You are on page 1of 412

NetVault

Administrator’s
Guide

Version 6.03
Release Date 01/15/2001
Copyrights
Software Copyright © 2001 BakBone Software
NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Copyright © 2001 BakBone Software
Printed and online versions.

This software product is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. The distribution and sale of
this product are intended for the use of the original purchaser only per the terms of the
License Agreement. All other product trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

The NetVault Administrator’s Guide documentation is copyrighted and all rights are reserved.

This document may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated,
reduced or transferred to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior
consent in writing from BakBone Software.

THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT.

THIS PUBLICATION COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INACCURACIES OR


TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS. CHANGES ARE PERIODICALLY ADDED TO THE
INFORMATION HEREIN; THESE CHANGES WILL BE INCORPORATED INTO NEW
EDITIONS OF THE PUBLICATION. BAKBONE SOFTWARE MAY MAKE IMPORVEMENTS
AND/OR CHANGES IN THE PRODUCT(S) AND/OR THE PROGRAM(S) DESCRIBED IN
THIS PUBLICATION AT ANY TIME.

BakBone Software
10145 Pacific Heights Blvd.
Suite 900
San Diego, California 92121
858.450.9009
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................... 1
Introducing NetVault ............................................................................................................. 3
NetVault Features ................................................................................................................. 3
NetVault Application Plugin Modules .................................................................................... 4
About This Guide .................................................................................................................. 4
Using Help ............................................................................................................................ 5
About BakBone Software...................................................................................................... 6
Technical Support ................................................................................................................. 6
BakBone Software Web Site: www.bakbone.com.......................................................... 6
Helpdesk Support Lines ................................................................................................. 6

CHAPTER 2
MANAGING NETVAULT SOFTWARE ............................................................................. 7
Installing NetVault Software .................................................................................................. 9
Types of Installation ....................................................................................................... 9
General Installation Requirements ................................................................................. 9
Windows NT Installation............................................................................................... 10
AIX 4.2 and 4.3 (IBM RS 6000) ................................................................................... 16
Compaq TRU64 (4.0b and later) .................................................................................. 17
FreeBSD 3.2................................................................................................................. 17
HP-UX 10 and 11, HP9000/700 HP9000/800 .............................................................. 17
IRIX 6.2 and 6.5 (Silicon Graphics, SGI)...................................................................... 18
LINUX (Intel x86).......................................................................................................... 18
Microsoft Windows 2000 .............................................................................................. 18
Microsoft Windows 95/98 Client ................................................................................... 19
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (Intel x86) .......................................................................... 19
NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03.................................................................................. 19
SCO Open Server 5 ..................................................................................................... 20
Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) ............................................................................................. 20
Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) ............................................................................................. 21
Sun Solaris 7 (Intel x86) ............................................................................................... 21
Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) ................................................................................................ 22
UnixWare 2.1.3............................................................................................................. 23
UnixWare 7................................................................................................................... 23
ii Contents

Calculating NetVault Database (NVDB) Size Requirements ........................................24


Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s................................................................................ 25
Installing a Plugin or APM .............................................................................................25
Removing a Plugin or APM ...........................................................................................26
Licenses for NetVault Products .......................................................................................... 26
Locating Machine IDs ...................................................................................................27
Requesting your License Key .......................................................................................28
Installing a License Key ................................................................................................28
Upgrading from Earlier Versions of NetVault ...................................................................... 30
Upgrading from NetVault 6.0.1 to a Later Version ........................................................30
Upgrading from NetVault 6.0.0 to a Later Version ........................................................30
Using the NetVault Configurator ......................................................................................... 31
Starting the Configurator ...............................................................................................32
Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog Box...................................................32
Using the Debugging (Tracing) Feature........................................................................37
Configuring NetVault 6.x..................................................................................................... 38
Configuring a SCSI LUN for a Linux kernel ..................................................................38
Setting up the kernel .....................................................................................................38
Uninstalling NetVault .......................................................................................................... 39
Uninstalling NetVault from Windows NT Machines.......................................................39
Uninstalling NetVault from Solaris or MP-RAS Machines .............................................40
Uninstalling NetVault from other UNIX or Linux Installations ........................................40

CHAPTER 3
NETVAULT BASICS .................................................................................................. 41
Graphical User Interface..................................................................................................... 43
Menu Bar ......................................................................................................................43
Command Toolbar ........................................................................................................45
Status Line ....................................................................................................................46
Managing Devices and Clients ........................................................................................... 46
Device Management Window .......................................................................................47
Client Management Window .........................................................................................48
Domain Management Window ......................................................................................48
Managing Media ................................................................................................................. 49
Media Management Window ........................................................................................50
Status Window ..............................................................................................................50
Backing Up Data................................................................................................................. 51
Backup Window ............................................................................................................52
Restoring Backed Up Data ................................................................................................. 53
Restore Window............................................................................................................53
Job Operations ................................................................................................................... 54
Jobs Window.................................................................................................................54
Logs Window ................................................................................................................55
NetVault Administrator’s Guide iii

Using Templates ................................................................................................................. 56


Policy Management Window ........................................................................................ 56
Searching for Data .............................................................................................................. 57
Selecting Items ................................................................................................................... 58

CHAPTER 4
DEVICE AND LIBRARY MANAGEMENT........................................................................ 59
What are NetVault Devices? ............................................................................................... 61
Device Types................................................................................................................ 61
Device Connections...................................................................................................... 61
Planning a Shared Device Installation.......................................................................... 61
Devices in a Windows NT Environment ....................................................................... 63
Shared Devices ............................................................................................................ 63
Setting up a Device ...................................................................................................... 63
Working with the Device Management Window.................................................................. 64
Menu Bar ...................................................................................................................... 64
Window Tabs................................................................................................................ 65
Icons and Drive Lights .................................................................................................. 65
The Devices Tab .......................................................................................................... 66
The Device Logs Tab ................................................................................................... 71
The Media Requests Tab ............................................................................................. 72
Adding NetVault Devices..................................................................................................... 77
Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client ............................................................. 77
Adding Libraries............................................................................................................ 81
Adding a Shared Library............................................................................................... 87
Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients ........................................................ 91
Adding Devices in Windows 2000 ................................................................................ 92
Working with Firewalls .................................................................................................. 94
Creating Virtual Libraries .............................................................................................. 94
Scanning Drives and Media ................................................................................................ 94
Scanning for Shared Drives.......................................................................................... 94
Scanning Media............................................................................................................ 95
Working with Cleaning Drives/Slots .................................................................................... 97
Configuring Cleaning Drives/Slots ................................................................................ 97
Checking Status on Cleaning Drives/Slots ................................................................... 98
Setting the Life of Cleaning Media.............................................................................. 100
Setting an Automatic Cleaning Interval ...................................................................... 100
Manually Cleaning Media ........................................................................................... 101

CHAPTER 5
CLIENT MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................... 103
Client Management ........................................................................................................... 105
The Client Management Window ...................................................................................... 105
iv Contents

Using the Available NetVault Machines List Box ........................................................106


Using the Clients List Box ...........................................................................................107
Using Find NetVault Machine .....................................................................................108
Adding a NetVault Client.................................................................................................... 111

CHAPTER 6
DOMAIN MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................... 115
Domain Management ........................................................................................................117
The NetVault Domain Management Window.....................................................................117
Using the Available NetVault Servers List Box ...........................................................118
Using the Controlled Servers List Box ........................................................................119
Using Find NetVault Machine .....................................................................................121

CHAPTER 7
MEDIA MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................ 125
Media Management.......................................................................................................... 127
The Media Management Window..................................................................................... 127
Using the Media List Box ............................................................................................128
Status Information in Details Area ..............................................................................129
Using the Backup Saveset Pop-up Menu ...................................................................135
Backup Saveset Information in Details Area...............................................................135

CHAPTER 8
NETVAULT SERVER STATUS .................................................................................. 139
The NetVault Server Status Window ................................................................................ 141
Using the Device Status Area .....................................................................................142
Using the Client Status Area .......................................................................................143
Using the Job Status Area ..........................................................................................143
Using Operator Status Area ........................................................................................146

CHAPTER 9
DISASTER RECOVERY ............................................................................................ 147
Disaster Recovery ............................................................................................................ 149
The NetVault Database .................................................................................................... 149
Backing Up the NetVault Database .................................................................................. 149
NetVault Database Recovery ........................................................................................... 149
Restoring Basic Operating System .............................................................................149
Restoring NetVault Operation .....................................................................................150
Handling Backups Since Last NV Database Backup ..................................................150
Restoring the NetVault Database ..................................................................................... 150
Importing Media Unknown to NV Database ..................................................................... 151
Using the Data Copy Plugin ............................................................................................. 151
Target Audience..........................................................................................................152
NetVault Administrator’s Guide v

Installing the Data Copy Plugin .................................................................................. 152


Backing Up Data with the Data Copy Plugin .............................................................. 152
Copying Data.............................................................................................................. 152
Copying a Backup ...................................................................................................... 155
Copying a Backup Set ................................................................................................ 156

CHAPTER 10
BACKING UP DATA ................................................................................................ 157
Backing up Your Data ....................................................................................................... 159
The NetVault Backup Window........................................................................................... 159
Backup Window Buttons............................................................................................. 160
Window Tabs.............................................................................................................. 160
Menu Commands ....................................................................................................... 161
Using the Selections Tab............................................................................................ 162
Using the Backup Options Tab................................................................................... 168
Using the Schedule Tab ............................................................................................. 173
Using the Target Tab.................................................................................................. 174
Advanced Options ...................................................................................................... 178
Savesets..................................................................................................................... 178
Incremental Backup Procedure......................................................................................... 179
Creating a Typical Weekly Full and Incremental Schedule ........................................ 179
Restoring Incremental Backups ........................................................................................ 180
Doing a Simple Backup..................................................................................................... 180
Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin ......................................................... 182
Installing the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin .............................................. 182
How the Plugin Works ................................................................................................ 182
Consolidating Backups ............................................................................................... 182
Using the Raw Device Plugin............................................................................................ 186
Installing the Raw Device Plugin ................................................................................ 186
Using the Raw Device Plugin for NT .......................................................................... 187
Using the Raw Device Plugin for UNIX ...................................................................... 192

CHAPTER 11
RESTORING DATA .................................................................................................. 197
Restoring Data .................................................................................................................. 199
The NetVault Restore Window .......................................................................................... 199
Restore Window Buttons ............................................................................................ 200
Window Tabs.............................................................................................................. 200
Menu Commands ....................................................................................................... 201
Using the Selections Tab............................................................................................ 202
Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection.................................................................. 205
Using the Restore Search Facility .............................................................................. 209
Using Restore Filter Options ...................................................................................... 210
vi Contents

Using the Restore Options Tab...................................................................................212


Using the Target Client Tab ........................................................................................215
Using the Schedule Tab..............................................................................................216
Using the Advanced Options Tab ...............................................................................217
Savesets .....................................................................................................................218
Restoring Incremental Backups........................................................................................ 218
Doing a Simple Restore.................................................................................................... 221

CHAPTER 12
SCHEDULING BACKUP & RESTORE JOBS ............................................................... 225
Scheduling Jobs ............................................................................................................... 227
Schedule Options........................................................................................................227
Using Schedule - Immediate .......................................................................................228
Using Schedule - Once ...............................................................................................228
Using Schedule - Repeating .......................................................................................232
Using Schedule - Triggered ........................................................................................237

CHAPTER 13
JOB MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................ 239
Managing Jobs ................................................................................................................. 241
Job Management Tabs ...............................................................................................241
Using The Status Tab .................................................................................................242
Using the Jobs Tab .....................................................................................................245
Using the History Tab .................................................................................................247

CHAPTER 14
USING LOGS ......................................................................................................... 249
Using Logs........................................................................................................................ 251
The Logs Window............................................................................................................. 251
Logs Window Buttons .................................................................................................252
Using the Logs Window ..............................................................................................252
Viewing Extended Logs ..............................................................................................254
More Info - Job Messages ..........................................................................................255
More Info - Warnings ..................................................................................................256
More Info - Errors ........................................................................................................257
Filtering Logs ..............................................................................................................258
Using the Filter Options Dialog Box ............................................................................259

CHAPTER 15
USING POLICY (SET) TEMPLATES........................................................................... 263
What are Policy (Set) Templates? .................................................................................... 265
Types of Policy Sets ......................................................................................................... 265
Backup and Restore Job Sets ....................................................................................265
NetVault Administrator’s Guide vii

Backup Job Sets......................................................................................................... 265


Restore Job Sets ........................................................................................................ 266
Standard Policy (Set) Operations ............................................................................... 266
Saving a Set using the Save As button ...................................................................... 267
Loading a Set using the Load button.......................................................................... 268
Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box ........................................................ 268
Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded)........................................... 269
Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (Set Loaded) ................................................ 269
Guidelines for using Schedule Sets............................................................................ 270
Using Policy Management ................................................................................................ 270

CHAPTER 16
USING ADVANCED FEATURES ................................................................................ 271
What are Advanced Features? ......................................................................................... 273
Using the Advanced Options Tab...................................................................................... 273
Backup Life (Backup only).......................................................................................... 274
Compression (Backup and Restore) .......................................................................... 274
Verify after Backup (Backup only) .............................................................................. 275
Duplication (Backup only) ........................................................................................... 275
Pre and Post Scripts (Backup and Restore) ............................................................... 278
NetVault Jobs, Pre & Post Scripts Execution Logic.................................................... 280
Working with Firewalls ...................................................................................................... 288

APPENDIX A
PERFORMANCE TUNING ......................................................................................... 289
What is Performance Tuning?........................................................................................... 291
Optimizing Drive Performance .......................................................................................... 291
Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box ................................................................................... 292
From a Selected Drive................................................................................................ 292
From the Device Management Window ..................................................................... 292
From the Library Configure Tab ................................................................................. 293
Using the Edit Drive Window ............................................................................................ 294
Relationship between Block Size and Shared Memory Size...................................... 297
Gathering Statistics ........................................................................................................... 297
Viewing the Statistics.................................................................................................. 298
Understanding How the Data Stream is Handled.............................................................. 302

APPENDIX B
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................... 303
Getting Help ...................................................................................................................... 305
Dumping Log Files ............................................................................................................ 305
Producing Trace Files ....................................................................................................... 306
Running the NetVault Configurator ................................................................................... 306
NetVault for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0...................................................................... 306
viii Contents

NetVault for UNIX .......................................................................................................306


Help with Common Problems ........................................................................................... 307
Waiting for Media ........................................................................................................307
Checking Media Request, Media Status and Job Log ................................................307
Block Sizes and Shared Memory Configuration .........................................................308
Tips on Backing Up Sybase ........................................................................................308
Using CPIO to Retrieve Files from a NetVault Tape ...................................................309
Informix Configurations ...............................................................................................311
Missing Icons in the NetVault GUI ..............................................................................311
Multiple Network Interface Cards (NIC) and communication problems ......................311
Overheads in writing to tape .......................................................................................312
Oracle backup fails with "Can't open XXXX" message ...............................................312
Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients .......313
Why does NetVault not allow you to backup the proc directory? ................................314

APPENDIX C
USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS ............................................................................. 315
What is a Regular Expression? ........................................................................................ 317
Where are Regular Expressions Used? ........................................................................... 317
Using Regular Expressions .............................................................................................. 317

APPENDIX D
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE SUPPORT................................................................... 321
Platform and Operating System Support.......................................................................... 323
Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver ..................................................................... 323
Installation from Image File .........................................................................................323
Copying the Software from the CD-ROM....................................................................324
Installing the Software from Image .............................................................................324
Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver................................................................325
Post-Installation ..........................................................................................................327
Specifying Media Changer to RS6000 ........................................................................327
NetVault Utilities..........................................................................................................327

APPENDIX E
CREATING VIRTUAL LIBRARIES .............................................................................. 329
Creating Virtual Libraries .................................................................................................. 331
Getting Set Up to Create a Virtual Library ..................................................................331
Generating Disk Devices ............................................................................................332

APPENDIX F
USING THE NETVAULT CONFIGURATOR .................................................................. 335
Using the NetVault Configurator ....................................................................................... 337
Machine Tab ...............................................................................................................337
License Tab ................................................................................................................338
NetVault Administrator’s Guide ix

Service Tab ................................................................................................................ 339


Packages Tab............................................................................................................. 340
General Tab................................................................................................................ 341
Plugin Options Tab ..................................................................................................... 343
Fire Wall Tab .............................................................................................................. 344
GUI Tab ...................................................................................................................... 345
Logging Daemon Tab ................................................................................................. 349
Media Manager Tab ................................................................................................... 351
Network Manager Tab ................................................................................................ 352
Schedule Manager Tab .............................................................................................. 355
Security Tab .............................................................................................................. 357

APPENDIX G
USING THE REPORTING TOOL ................................................................................ 359
Using the Reporting Tool................................................................................................... 361
Running nvreport from the Command Line ....................................................................... 361
Report Arguments ............................................................................................................. 361
Simple Report Example .................................................................................................... 362
Using Filters Example ....................................................................................................... 363
Sorting Output ................................................................................................................... 364
Creating Custom Templates.............................................................................................. 365
Making New Templates .............................................................................................. 366
Using the Server Argument ........................................................................................ 367
Fields Available for Reports .............................................................................................. 367
Report: jobdefinitions (jd)............................................................................................ 368
Report: jobhistory (jh) ................................................................................................. 369
Report: advancedoptions (ao) .................................................................................... 370
Report: schedules (sc)................................................................................................ 370
Report: backuptargets (bt).......................................................................................... 370
Report: selections (se)................................................................................................ 370
Constants and Syntax ....................................................................................................... 370

INDEX
CHAPTER 1

Introduction
Introducing NetVault - 3
NetVault Features - 3
NetVault Application Plugin Modules - 4
About This Guide - 4
Using Help - 5
About BakBone Software - 6
Technical Support - 6
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 3

Introducing NetVault
Information is a priceless asset to organizations. As storage environments grow, it becomes
increasingly difficult to backup corporate data while keeping the applications your users
need up and running.
NetVault from BakBone Software is a scalable solution for departments, data centers and
enterprises available on UNIX and Windows NT operating systems. NetVault is built on a
modular software architecture created for expansion, growth and continued enhancement of
a growing variety of applications. NetVault also supports various storage network designs,
including Storage Area Networks (SAN) and Network Attached Storage (NAS). Providing
enterprise-wide control in distributed and centralized environments, NetVault is able to
operate in multi-vendor networks and supports a broad range of servers, clients, database
applications, storage media and high performance devices.

NetVault Features
The NetVault storage management features are many and varied and include:
n Use of native NetVault API for application integration.
n Easy-to-use administration graphical user interface (GUI) for both UNIX and Windows.
n Point and click installation of Application Plugin Modules (APM™) to NetVault servers or
clients across networks.
n Define pre and post processing scripts.
n Support for raw devices and file systems.
n Extensive low level error checking, logging and reporting.
n Tunable shared transfer memory and block size for optimized performance.
n Local or remote backup and recovery.
n SAN-enabled and LAN-free backup.
n Dynamically Shared Devices across SANs or shared SCSI.
n Library Sharing among servers and clients.
n Duplication for off-site disaster recovery.
n Disk staging for increased performance across networks.
n Supports as many data streams as there are devices.
n Standard, non-proprietary tape formats, CPIO for UNIX and MTF for Windows.
4 Chapter 1
Introduction

NetVault Application Plugin Modules


NetVault offers Application Plugin Modules (APM™) which, when combined with the
NetVault software, provide application specific interfaces for a wide variety of database
managers, including:
n Microsoft® Exchange™
n Microsoft SQL™
n DB2™
n Sybase™
n Informix™
n Oracle Online™
n Oracle RMAN™
n SAP R/3 Backint™
Each of the APM’s is explained in detail in the NetVault Application Plugin Module User’s
Guide.

About This Guide


In the Administrator’s Guide you will find basic NetVault operations for managing your
devices and data.

NOTE: This guide assumes you have a working knowledge of your computer
and its operating conventions, including how to use a mouse and standard
menus and commands. It also assumes you know how to open, save, and close
files. For help with any of these techniques, please see your Operating System
documentation.

The Administrator’s Guide is divided into four sections:


n Section One: The first section introduces you to NetVault, its features and BakBone
Software. It explains how to install and manage the NetVault software. Section one also
includes information on the user interface, basic operations and how to search for and
select data items.
n Section Two: The second section contains a series of chapters devoted to managing
your devices, libraries, clients and domains.
n Section Three: In section three you will learn how to manage the media you use to store
your data. You will also discover how to back up your data and restore that data when
necessary. In addition, there are instructions on how to schedule and manage the jobs
you run, and how to use the job logs.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 5

n Section Four: Section four contains information on using Policy Sets to record and re-
use job options. In this section you will also learn about the advanced options used to
further define the way you work with your data.

Using Help
NetVault provides a fully interactive online help system. By pressing the F1 key, you can
open the help files at any time, as shown in the following figure:

From the Help Contents window you can:


n Learn How to use Help
n Learn how to Get Started
n Access the Help Index
n Access the Glossary
n Display Procedures
n Display Functional Descriptions
n Click on a specific icon to learn about a management function or job operation
6 Chapter 1
Introduction

n Open the help topics for menu commands


n Learn more about plugins from the NetVault Plugin Index

About BakBone Software


Headquartered in San Diego, California, BakBone Software is a storage-management
software company with offices worldwide. BakBone Software is committed to developing and
providing high-performance backup and recovery, archival, near-line and off-line storage
solutions that address the problems of modern data storage management.

Technical Support
BakBone Software is dedicated to providing friendly, expert advice to NetVault product
customers. Our highly trained professionals are available to answer your questions, offer
solutions to your problems and generally help you make the most of your NetVault purchase.
Log on to our web site, or contact our Helpdesk, for more information.
BakBone Software Web Site: www.bakbone.com

Helpdesk Support Lines


Area Contact
North America 1.877.955.BONE (955.2663)
e-mail: support@bakbone.com
Europe +44.1202.244727
+44.1202.244728
e-mail: support@bakbone.co.uk
Asia Pacific Rim +81.3.5908.3517
e-mail: support@bakbone.co.jp
CHAPTER 2

Managing NetVault Software


Installing NetVault Software - 9
n Types of Installation - 9
n General Installation Requirements - 9
n Windows NT Installation - 10
n AIX 4.2 and 4.3 (IBM RS 6000) - 16
n Compaq TRU64 (4.0b and later) - 17
n FreeBSD 3.2 - 17
n HP-UX 10 and 11, HP9000/700 HP9000/800 - 17
n IRIX 6.2 and 6.5 (Silicon Graphics, SGI) - 18
n LINUX (Intel x86) - 18
n Microsoft Windows 2000 - 18
n Microsoft Windows 95/98 Client - 19
n Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (Intel x86) - 19
n NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03 - 19
n SCO Open Server 5 - 20
n Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) - 20
n Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) - 21
n Sun Solaris 7 (Intel x86) - 21
n Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) - 22
n UnixWare 2.1.3 - 23
n UnixWare 7 - 23
n Calculating NetVault Database (NVDB) Size Requirements - 24
Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s - 25
n Installing a Plugin or APM - 25
n Removing a Plugin or APM - 26
Licenses for NetVault Products - 26
n Locating Machine IDs - 27
n Requesting your License Key - 28
n Installing a License Key - 28
Upgrading from Earlier Versions of NetVault - 30
Using the NetVault Configurator - 31
8 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

n Starting the Configurator - 32


n Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog Box - 32
n Using the Debugging (Tracing) Feature - 37
Configuring NetVault 6.x - 38
n Configuring a SCSI LUN for a Linux kernel - 38
n Setting up the kernel - 38
Uninstalling NetVault - 39
n Uninstalling NetVault from Windows NT Machines - 39
n Uninstalling NetVault from Solaris or MP-RAS Machines - 40
n Uninstalling NetVault from other UNIX or Linux Installations - 40
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 9

Installing NetVault Software


NetVault Software is easy to install. The instructions contained here are also available in the
booklet included in the software’s CD-ROM case. Familiarize yourself with the following
information before installing the NetVault software.

Types of Installation
There are three types of installations:
n NetVault Server System: Provides the full range of NetVault facilities with
local control using an installed Graphical User Interface (GUI), or remotely
over the network with proper security authorization. This type of installation
can also act as a client.
n NetVault Client System: Provides a subset of NetVault facilities, without the
local device support, controlled remotely over the network with proper security
authorization.
n Custom NetVault System: Provides the facility to install specific NetVault
modules.

General Installation Requirements


Before installing NetVault Software, the following requirements must be in place:
n Sufficient disk space to install and use the software. The amount of disk
space required depends on the operating system, installation method and
likely usage of the NetVault system. For example, in a NetVault Enterprise
System backing up a large number of NetVault clients, the NetVault Database
directory could be fairly large and require more disk space. If you need
assistance determining the amount of space required, contact BakBone
Technical Support (page 6).
n A TCP/IP network. A TCP/IP network is required unless you intend to use the
NetVault Software in a standalone configuration. This type of network is not
necessary if the NetVault Server is backing itself up to a local device.
n NetVault Graphic Requirements. Minimum graphic display resolution (under
Microsoft Windows NT or UNIX X-Windows) of 800 x 600 pixels displaying
256 colors.

NOTE: Refer to Appendix D, Hardware and Software Support (page 321) to


determine whether the operating system, platform, and tape device you are
using is supported. You can also find this information on the NetVault
Technical Support web site at http://www.netvault.co.uk.
10 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

Windows NT Installation
The requirements for installing NetVault on a Windows NT system are as follows:
n A computer running Microsoft Windows NT, version 4.0 with at least 32 Mbytes
RAM. At this time only the Intel processor (or compatible) is supported. You
must also have SP3 (NT 4.0) or later installed.
n Approximately 10 Mbytes of available disk space; more if you intend to use this
machine to control a large NetVault domain (a server and many clients) or large
multi-drive tape libraries.
n For NetVault Server and Custom installations (with the GUI), it is necessary to
pre-install Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 3.02 or later, in order to use the
HTML-based help system (NT version 4.0 or later) included with the NetVault
Software.
n A TCP/IP network if you are not using the software in a standalone
configuration.

Installation Procedure
To install the NetVault Software on a Windows NT workstation or server, follow these
steps:
1. Log on as the Administrator or as a user with Administrator privileges.
2. Close all programs.
3. Insert Disk 1 into the CD-ROM drive.
4. Run SETUP.EXE.

NOTE: The CD-ROM distribution is split into disk folders, which may be
copied to make a set of installation floppy disks. By running SETUP.EXE in
the first disk folder, all the software in the other disk folders will automatically
be installed, without re-selection.

An InstallShield Wizard opens and begins the installation setup.


NetVault Administrator’s Guide 11

5. Once the InstallShield Wizard has loaded, the NetVault Setup Welcome dialog
box opens, as shown in the following figure:

6. Click Next to open the License Agreement window:


12 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

7. Click Next to open the User Information dialog box:

8. Enter your Name and Company and click Next to open the Choose Destination
Location dialog box:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 13

9. If the Destination Folder is where you want the software to be installed, click
Next to proceed to the Enter Database dialog box:

10. Click Next to open the Setup Type dialog box. If you want to change the
destination for the installation, click the Browse button; navigate to and select
the desired location, then click Next to proceed.
The Setup Type dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure:

11. Select the desired Setup Type for the type of installation you are doing:
n Custom NetVault System
n NetVault Client System
n NetVault Server System
14 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

12. Click Next to open the Enter Machine Name dialog box:

13. Enter the desired NetVault Machine Name. This name does not have to be the
same as your computer machine name, but it is recommended that the NetVault
machine name be the same as the computer name.

NOTE: Machine names are alpha/numeric strings of any length with the
exception of capital letters, spaces and punctuation (especially hyphens).
Do not use these characters in your machine names.

14. Click Next to open the NetVault Password dialog box:


NetVault Administrator’s Guide 15

15. Enter the NetVault Password information.

NOTE: The NetVault Security Password allows access to your machine from
NetVault. This information should be secured so that only the NetVault
Domain Administrators for your system have access to it.

You can change the password and disable security using the NetVault
Configurator. See Using the NetVault Configurator (page 31) for more
information.

16. Click Next.


The InstallShield progress meter appears, as shown in the following figure:
16 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

When the installation is complete, the Setup Complete dialog box opens:

17. Select the desired option by clicking the appropriate option button:
n Yes, I want to restart my computer now.
n No, I will restart my computer later.
18. Click Finish.

NOTE: It is recommended that you restart your computer. Some NetVault


files require updating with a reboot in order to function properly.

AIX 4.2 and 4.3 (IBM RS 6000)


Mounting the CD-ROM:
If the CD-ROM is not already mounted, mount it using the SMIT utility
Use the SMIT utility to install the CD-ROM file:
/aix/image
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the commands:
cd <cdrom>/aix
(where <cdrom> is the device node for your CD-ROM)
./install nvdist
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 17

Compaq TRU64 (4.0b and later)


Mounting the CD-ROM:
Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point
/cdrom already exists):
su root
mount -r -t cdfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
cd /CDROM/TRU64
./INSTALL NVDIST

NOTE: Ensure install has execute permission.

FreeBSD 3.2
Mounting the CD-ROM:
Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point
/cdrom already exists):
su root
mount -rt cd9660 <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
cd/cdrom/cdrom0/freebsd
./install nvdist

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

HP-UX 10 and 11, HP9000/700 HP9000/800


Mounting the CD-ROM:
Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /
cdrom already exists):
su root
18 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

mount -r -F cdfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom


Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
cd /HP
./INSTALL NVDIST

NOTE: Ensure install has execute permission

IRIX 6.2 and 6.5 (Silicon Graphics, SGI)


Mounting the CD-ROM:
Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point
/cdrom already exists):
su root
mount -t iso9660 <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the commands:
cd /cdrom/irix
./install nvdist

LINUX (Intel x86)


Mounting the CD-ROM:
Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point
/mnt/cdrom already exists):
su root
mount /mnt/cdrom
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the commands:
cd /cdrom/linux
./install nvdist

Microsoft Windows 2000


Installing the NetVault Software:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 19

1. Log on as Administrator, or as a user account with Administrator privileges.


2. Close down as many other applications as possible, and insert the NetVault
distribution CD-ROM into the relevant drive.
3. Run setup.exe located as follows:
<cd drive>\w2k\disk1\setup.exe

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Microsoft Windows 95/98 Client


Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on to the Windows95/98 machine.
2. Close down as many other applications as possible, and insert the NetVault
distribution CD-ROM into the relevant drive.
3. Run setup.exe located as follows:
<cd drive>\win9x\disk1\setup.exe

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (Intel x86)


Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as Administrator, or as a user account with Administrator privileges.
2. Close down as many other applications as possible, and insert the NetVault
distribution CD-ROM into the relevant drive.
3. Run setup.exe located as follows:
<cd drive>\nt\disk1\setup.exe
In order to use the integrated HTML-base help system, it is necessary to have
Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.02 or later, installed.

NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03


Mounting the CD-ROM:
Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point
/cdrom already exists):
su root
mount -r -F cdfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom
20 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

Installing the NetVault Software:


1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
pkgadd -d /cdrom/ncr/simage
(for NetVault Server installation), or
pkgadd -d /cdrom/ncr/cimage
(for NetVault Client installation).

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

SCO Open Server 5


Mounting the CD-ROM:
Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point
/cdrom already exists):
su root
mount -r <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
cd/cdrom/cdrom0/sco
pkgadd -d/cdrom/cdrom0/sco/simage
(for NetVault Server installation), or
pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/sco/cimage
(for NetVault Client installation).

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC)


Mounting the CD-ROM:
If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automatically
when you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0.
Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming
the mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists):
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 21

su root
mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage
(for NetVault Server installation), or
pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage
(for NetVault Client installation).

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC)


Mounting the CD-ROM:
If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automatically
when you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0.
Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming
the mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists):
su root
mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage
(for NetVault Server installation), or
pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage
(for NetVault Client installation).

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Sun Solaris 7 (Intel x86)


Mounting the CD-ROM:
22 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automatically


when you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0.
Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming
the mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists):
su root
mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage
(for NetVault Server installation), or
pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage
(for NetVault Client installation).

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC)


Mounting the CD-ROM:
If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automatically
when you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0.
Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming
the mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists):
su root
mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage
(for NetVault Server installation), or
pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage
(for NetVault Client installation).

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 23

UnixWare 2.1.3
Mounting the CD-ROM:
If the CD-ROM does not mount automatically, mount it using the following
commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists):
su root
mount -F cdfs -o ro <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
cd/cdrom/uware213
./install nvdist

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

UnixWare 7
Mounting the CD-ROM:
If the CD-ROM does not mount automatically, mount it using the following
commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists):
su root
mount -F cdfs -o ro <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom
Installing the NetVault Software:
1. Log on as root.
2. Run the command:
cd/cdrom/uware7
pkgadd -d/cdrom/uware7/simage
(for NetVault Server installation), or
pkgadd -d /cdrom/uware7/cimage
(for NetVault Client installation).

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the
security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.
24 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

Calculating NetVault Database (NVDB) Size Requirements


When the NetVault server software is installed, the installation includes a NetVault
Database directory (db or nvdb) containing four sub-directories:
n Install (tiny- 'modules' binary file detailing modules installed).
n Keys (tiny- licence key files for the main software and any plugins).
n MediaDatabase (LARGE after a while! - holds records for media and backups
performed).
n ScheduleDatabase (small <10 Mbytes - holds records for all backup and
restore jobs).
The only portion of the database for which size requirements are an issue is the
MediaDatabase. The NetVault Administrator of a particular NetVault domain must
estimate the anticipated size of the database to properly allocate adequate disk
space for growth.
To calculate the space requirements, you must have the following information:
1. The approximate number of files and directories being backed up in the NetVault
Domain (i.e. on the NetVault server and all NetVault clients).
Each file and directory backed up requires 60 bytes for an index entry in the NetVault
Database.
2. How many generations of each file are being kept.
Each generation is a separate instance of a file or directory backup. For
example, if the same file is backed up seven times, using default backup
settings, there are said to be seven generations of the file held on media and
indexed in the NetVault Database.
By default, backups have an infinite life (i.e. the number of generations increases
for every backup, causing the NetVault Database to continuously grow in size).
Most systems cannot handle this amount of storage requirement, so it is part of
the NetVault Administrator's tasks to ensure that a suitable Backup Life is
applied to each backup (a setting found in the Advanced Options tab of the
NetVault Backup window). Information on the Backup Life option can be found in
Using Help (page 5) and in Backup Life (Backup only) (page 274).
One example of calculating the NetVault Database size requirements is:
If 200,000 files and 15,000 directories are backed up once, approximately 13
Megabytes for the NetVault Database indexing is required. If the same files and
directories are backed up three times, 39 Megabytes would be required.
Under normal circumstances, it is reasonable to set a Backup Life option of Discard
after 7 Full Backups for File System backups.
With this option set, only seven generations of files/directories are retained (using the
File System plugin) for a particular backup selection. On the eighth backup, the first
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 25

backup set of files/directories is discarded and removed from the NetVault Database
index.
A formula for estimating the space requirements (in bytes) for a number of machines
is:
Approximate Approximate
number of files number of Number of
and directories generations to X machines
X backed up X 60
backed up per be kept using
machine Backup Life
options

NOTES:

(1) For some types of backup (e.g. online backup of some databases) it is
necessary to keep a very large number of generations. Consult Technical
Support (page 6) if space considerations are likely to be an issue.

(2) Some Backup Life settings may not clearly indicate the likely number of
generations. For example, when choosing the 'Discard after 25 weeks'
setting, the number of generations kept depends on how many times you
actually do this backup within the 25 week period.

Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s


NetVault plugins and APM’s are installed and removed from the NetVault Client
Management window. A NetVault plugin or APM can be installed on any client of the
NetVault server appearing in the Server Selection list.

NOTE: NetVault software includes a number of plugins which are


automatically installed. They are the Consolidated Backups, Data Copy,
Consolidated File System Backups and Raw Device plugins. If you delete
any of these plugins you must reinstall NetVault to get them back. APM’s can
be installed and uninstalled as desired.

Installing a Plugin or APM


1. Open the NetVault Client Management window by clicking the Client
Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the
Administration Client Management command.
2. Select the desired client in the Clients list.
26 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

3. Right-click and choose Install Software from the pop-up menu, as shown in the
following figure:

4. Navigate to and select the appropriate installation software.


5. Click Open to begin the installation process.
When the installation is complete, a successful installation message appears in
the Install Software dialog box.

Removing a Plugin or APM


1. Open the NetVault Client Management window by clicking the Client
Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the
Administration Client Management command.
2. Select the desired client in the Clients list.
3. Right-click and choose Remove Software from the pop-up menu.

Licenses for NetVault Products


Once installed, the NetVault software is operational for an evaluation period of 45 days.
To license purchased products, locate your machine IDs, contact BakBone Technical Support
(page 6) for a license and then install the License Key. Each of these steps is detailed in the
following sections.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 27

Locating Machine IDs


To get the IDs of your NetVault machine (normally the NetVault server):
1. Open the NetVault Client Management window, by clicking the Client
Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the
Administration Client Management command.

2. Select the machine to be licensed in the Clients list.


3. Choose Properties from the pop-up menu to open the Client Properties dialog
box:

The Machine ID is displayed in the System tab.


28 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

Requesting your License Key


To request a NetVault License Key, provide the information on the Activation Key
Request form to your local BakBone contact.
n Serial Number (as displayed on the label in the CD-ROM case - e.g., 01-01-
0129).
n Company.
n Contact Name.
n Street Address.
n City.
n State.
n Zip/Postal code.
n Country (if located outside the United States)
n Phone Number.
n Fax Number.
n E-Mail.
n Reseller/Distributor.
n Machine ID of NetVault Server and any applicable Value-added Application
Plugin Modules purchased for and installed on that machine.

Local BakBone Contacts


Send your completed license request form/information to your local BakBone contact
as follows:
Area E-mail Fax Web*
Asia keys@bakbone.co.jp 81-3-5908-2472 www.bakbone.com/
Pacific apac_keyrequest.asp
Rim
Europe production@netvault.co.uk N/A www.bakbone.com/
uk_keyrequest.asp
Unites keys@bakbone.com 858-450-0150 www.bakbone.com/
States keyrequest.asp
*When you complete the Activation Key Request form on the web site and click
Submit it will be sent automatically to the proper location for processing.

Installing a License Key


A NetVault License Key is valid only for the Machine ID for which it is issued. License
Keys are e-mailed (or faxed) directly to the customer. It is recommended that the key
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 29

be copied directly from the email into the Enter Key String box to avoid possible
errors.
To install the license key:
1. Open the NetVault Client Management window by clicking the Client
Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the
Administration Client Management command.
2. Select the desired machine from the Clients list.
3. Right-click and choose Install License Key from the pop-up menu, shown in
the following figure:

A dialog box appears as shown in the following figure:

4. Copy the new key information from the e-mail into the Enter Key String box.
5. Click OK.
30 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

If the license key is installed successfully, a message dialog box appears:

6. Click OK to complete the license key installation.

Upgrading from Earlier Versions of NetVault


Upgrading NetVault depends on the NetVault version you are upgrading from. Use the
following procedures as general guidelines only:

Upgrading from NetVault 6.0.1 to a Later Version


Run the install program as if you are doing a new install (dependant on the OS, as
described in the CD-ROM booklet):
1. The installation program will recognize that NetVault is already installed and the
relevant software modules will be automatically updated.
2. There should be no problem regarding existing backup jobs or media created
under Version 6.0.1.
3. Two new plugins are installed in a sub-directory of NetVault6: (1) the Data Copy
plugin (for copying backups or backup sets from one item of media to another),
and (2) the Consolidated File Server Backups plugin (which consolidates a
Full backup and a number of incremental backups into a single backup saveset).
These two new plugins are extras which can be installed into the active software
and have no effect on what was done under Version 6.0.1.

Upgrading from NetVault 6.0.0 to a Later Version


To upgrade from NetVault 6.0.0 to a later version, use the same steps as a new
install procedure, as described in Installing NetVault Software (page 9). In addition,
please note the following:
1. The installation program recognizes that NetVault is already installed and the
relevant software modules are automatically updated.
2. Backup jobs performed using the Version 6.0.0 UNIX File System plugin (under
UNIX) and NT File System plugin (under NT) are automatically altered to use the
new unified File System plugin introduced under Version 6.0.1.
3. Scheduled file system plugin jobs remain in the schedule after a reboot, and will
run as scheduled using the new File System plugin.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 31

4. When upgrading a NetVault server or client for NT, it is necessary to re-create


all NT Registry backups. Under NetVault 6.0.0 these were performed using a
separate NT Registry plugin; under NetVault 6.0.1 the registry can be selected
as the last item appearing under the File System plugin so that a backup of the
NT Registry can be included with any File System backup job for NT.
5. Devices are now added by default with the client name (i.e. NetVault name for
the machine, not necessarily the machine name, on either a NetVault server or
NetVault client) as the first item of the standalone drive or library name. Note
that a device can be named almost any name you choose when adding a
device and, in some circumstances, the user MUST enter a name other than the
default name.

General Guidelines for Upgrading NetVault


n Backup your NetVault Database to a specific, identifiable item of media using
the Target Media By MID option.
n Make sure that you have enough time to do the upgrade and that everything is
working properly before important backups need to be run.
n Leave all normally used devices physically connected to the NetVault server
(or client) machines and added to NetVault. This ensures that the device
configuration data is properly upgraded.

Common Upgrade Problems and Solutions


When upgrading NetVault software installed using pkgadd (e.g. NCR MP-RAS and
Solaris), the system may not allow the upgrade.
For example:
n In the file /var/sadm/pkg/install/admin/default (on an NCR MP-RAS box), there
is a line that affects pkgadd upgrade:
If
instance=unique
you must remove and then re-add a package.
If
instance=overwrite
you can upgrade without removing and then re-adding a package.

Using the NetVault Configurator


The NetVault Configurator is a configuration tool included as part of the standard NetVault
installation, even when the NetVault GUI (Graphical User Interface) is not installed. NetVault
operates normally without the Configurator installed. There is no online help system for the
32 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

NetVault Configurator. For complete information on the Configurator, see Appendix F, Using
the NetVault Configurator (page 335).
Usually you will only use the NetVault Configurator to stop and re-start security settings. It is
recommended that you use the other options in the dialog box only under the guidance of
BakBone Technical Support (page 6).
For basic informational purposes, the main items of interest in the dialog box are described in
this section.

Starting the Configurator


To start the NetVault Configurator in a Windows NT environment:
1. Choose Start>Programs>NetVault >NetVault Configurator.
To start the NetVault Configurator in a UNIX environment:
1. Change to the NetVault6/bin directory.
2. Issue the command:
./nvconfigurator
(or use ./txtconfig for command line NetVault Configurator).

Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog Box


The NetVault Configurator dialog box contains a set of tabs that always appear in the
dialog box. Information within these tabs vary depending on the installation
circumstances.

Machine tab
The Machine tab details information about the machine on which NetVault is
installed, including the Machine ID required to get a permanent License Key after
product purchase.
Information on the Machine tab includes the Machine name, ID, network name, IP
addresses and software versions. This information is the same information available
in the Client Properties dialog box of the NetVault Interface.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 33

The NetVault Configurator’s Machine tab is shown in the following figure:

License Tab
The License tab details the Server Capabilities and the Serial Numbers of Applied
Keys for the machine on which NetVault is installed. This information is the same as
that available in the Server Properties dialog box of NetVault’s Domain
Management window.
The NetVault Configurator License tab is shown in the following figure:
34 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

Service Tab
The Service tab allows you to start and stop NetVault service. After installation, or
after a system re-boot, the NetVault Process Manager is automatically started. The
Current State of NetVault is displayed in the Service tab.
When necessary, you can Start NetVault and Stop NetVault by clicking the
appropriate buttons on the Service tab. Usually NetVault service is stopped only
when configuration settings must be changed, and only on the advice of BakBone
Technical Support (page 6).
The NetVault Configurator’s Service tab is shown in the following figure:

Packages Tab
The Packages tab is an alternative way to install or remove NetVault plugin software.
The plugin installation procedure is explained in Installing NetVault Plugins and
APM’s (page 25).
The Packages tab is useful when NetVault plugin software is to be installed locally on
a NetVault client (without a NetVault interface), rather than remotely from the
NetVault server.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 35

The NetVault Configurator’s Packages tab is shown in the following figure:

Security Tab
In the Security tab you can set a new password for the NetVault server or client
installation. In addition, security can be disabled by selecting the Disable Security
check box. When security is disabled, the machine can be accessed by any
NetVault Server.
36 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

The NetVault Configurator’s Security tab is shown in the following figure:

General Tab
If it becomes necessary to track down a problem in the NetVault program, you can
generate debugging files in the General tab of the NetVault Configurator dialog box
by selecting the Generate debugging files check box. The debugging trace files
allow BakBone Technical Support (page 6) to find and correct problems in your
NetVault software.
The NetVault Configurator’s General tab is shown in the following figure:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 37

Using the Debugging (Tracing) Feature


Under the direction of BakBone Technical Support (page 6), you can turn on or off
the debugging (tracing) feature. This feature allows you to record the activities of the
NetVault software in a file you can send to BakBone Technical Support for analysis.

Turning on debugging
1. Exit all open NetVault GUI windows.
2. Open the NetVault Configurator and select the Generate debugging files
check box on the General tab.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click the Service tab of the NetVault Configurator.
5. Click the Stop NetVault button and then click the Start NetVault button.
A trace sub-directory is created in the NetVault6 directory. Trace log files are
automatically created and updated as NetVault is used to track NetVault
activities.

NOTE: Trace files can become large quickly. Remember to turn off
debugging as soon as the facility is no longer needed.

Turning off debugging


1. Exit all open NetVault GUI windows.
2. Open the NetVault Configurator and clear the Generate debugging files check
box on the General tab.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click the Service tab of the NetVault Configurator.
5. Click the Stop NetVault button and then click the Start NetVault button.

Sending the File to BakBone Technical Support


When you have finished capturing the NetVault activities and the file is complete,
send the file to BakBone Technical Support for analysis. The following tips will
assure that the file is properly received:
n Reduce the size of the file by zipping (or compressing) it.
n Upload the file to the FTP site (ftp www.netvault.co.uk).
n Make every effort to refrain from sending the file in email. Because of the
usually large size of these files you can overload the email system, causing
the arrival of the file to fail.
n If you have any questions about the trace procedures, contact Technical
Support (page 6).
38 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

Configuring NetVault 6.x

Configuring a SCSI LUN for a Linux kernel


If you are using an autoloader with a SCSI LUN, you must modify your operating
system kernel. The kernel’s configuration needs to be set up before you begin
configuring NetVault. Here is a list of autoloaders that use LUNs.
n HP SureStor DAT - 6 slot autoloader (12000E, 24x6, 40x6)
n Sony TSL-A300C/A500C (AIT 1/2/4 slot)
n Sony TSL-9000/11000 (DAT, 8-slot)
n Seagate DDS4 Autoloader

Setting up the kernel


The following instructions define how to set up the kernel to increase the number of
SCSI LUN’s Linux will scan:

CAUTION: Modifying the kernel on your system can cause boot problems.

1. Make a backup copy of /etc/lilo.conf (e.g. cp /etc/lilo.con /etc/lilo.conf.bak).


2. Modify the /etc/lilo.conf file. Use the default Linux kernel setting of LUN 0. If
you’d like your operating system to use LUN 1 or higher, you’ll need to change
the configuration file (/etc/lilo.conf) as follows:
boot=/dev/hda5
map=/boot/map
install=/boot/boot.b
prompt
timeout=50
image=/boot/vmlinux-2.0.36-3
label=redhat5
root=/dev/hda5
initrd=/boot/initrd-2.0.36-3.img
read-only
append=”max_scsi_luns=8”
3. Add the line to the end of the file using a text editor such as vi. For example, if
you specify max_scsi_luns=8, NetVault allows Linux to recognize up to 8 LUNs
(e.g. LUNs 0 through 7).
4. Update lilo using the command:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 39

# lilo
5. Reboot your system.
6. Confirm that the modification has been completed. The kernel automatically
recognizes the SCSI device when rebooting. You can also confirm the changes
using the Dmesg command after rebooting.
An example of the output of the Dmesg command is shown in the following
figure:
…··??…·

(scsi0) <Adaptec AHA-294X Ultra SCSI host adapter> found at PCI 15/0
(scsi0) Wide Channel, SCSI ID=7, 16/255 SCBs
(scsi0) Warning - detected auto-termination
(scsi0) Please verify driver detected settings are correct.
(scsi0) If not, then please properly set the device termination
(scsi0) in the Adaptec SCSI BIOS by hitting CTRL-A when prompted
(scsi0) during machine bootup.
(scsi0) Cables present (Int-50 NO, Int-68 NO, Ext-68 YES)
(scsi0) Downloading sequencer code... 419 instructions downloaded
scsi0 : Adaptec AHA274x/284x/294x (EISA/VLB/PCI-Fast SCSI) 5.1.7/3.2.4
<Adaptec AHA-294X Ultra SCSI host adapter>
scsi : 1 hosts.
Vendor: SONY Model: TSL-A300C Rev: L202
Type: Sequential-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
(scsi0:0:1:0) Synchronous at 20.0 Mbyte/sec, offset 8.
Vendor: SONY Model: TSL-A300C Rev: L202
Type: Medium Changer ANSI SCSI revision: 02

NOTE: For more information on Linux SCSI settings, see Linux’s “SCSI-
HOWTO.txt” document.

Uninstalling NetVault

CAUTION: Uninstalling NetVault Software will remove all NetVault Database


entries. This will result in loss of all backup records performed with NetVault.

Uninstalling NetVault from Windows NT Machines


1. Choose Start>Programs>NetVault >Uninstall NetVault.
2. InstallShield will remove the Software Services, etc. If desired, click Yes to
remove the shared library files located in %SystemRoot%\System32 directory.
No other applications should be using these files.
3. Remove the ~NetVault6 installation directory.
40 Chapter 2
Managing NetVault Software

Uninstalling NetVault from Solaris or MP-RAS Machines


1. Type pkgrm nv6server to remove a NetVault Server Installation, or type
pkgrm nv6client to remove a NetVault Client.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the software.

Uninstalling NetVault from other UNIX or Linux Installations


1. Use the cd command to go to the NetVault installation directory, then go to the
<path>/netvault6/util directory.
2. Type ./nvuninstall at the command prompt.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the software.
CHAPTER 3

NetVault Basics
Graphical User Interface - 43
n Menu Bar - 43
n Command Toolbar - 45
n Status Line - 46
Managing Devices and Clients - 46
n Device Management Window - 47
n Client Management Window - 48
n Domain Management Window - 48
Managing Media - 49
n Media Management Window - 50
n Status Window - 50
Backing Up Data - 51
n Backup Window - 52
Restoring Backed Up Data - 53
n Restore Window - 53
Job Operations - 54
n Jobs Window - 54
n Logs Window - 55
Using Templates - 56
n Policy Management Window - 56
Searching for Data - 57
Selecting Items - 58
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 43

Graphical User Interface


The NetVault Graphical User Interface provides access to a variety of windows used to
manage your hardware and software configurations, and storage.
The main window of the interface appears, as shown in the following figure, when you start
NetVault:

The interface contains the menu bar, the command toolbars and the status line which are
explained in this section. Information about the windows opened by these commands can be
found in Managing Devices and Clients (page 46).

Menu Bar
The NetVault menu bar, shown in the following figure, provides access to the
NetVault functions and operations.

The commands available in each menu item are detailed in the following table:
Choose this
Menu To do this:
command:
File Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box where
you can select the desired printer and
specify its properties.
Exit Close all open windows and dialog
boxes and exit the program.
44 Chapter 3
NetVault Basics

Choose this
Menu To do this:
command:
View Toolbar Turn on or off the display of the com-
mand toolbar containing shortcut but-
tons to the menu commands.
Large Buttons Turn on or off the display of the large
icon shortcuts to the menu commands.
Font Open the Font dialog box where you
can change font and font size.
Operations Backup Open the Backup window where you
can select items for backup, schedule
jobs and set job options.
Restore Open the Restore window where you
can select backed up items to be
restored, schedule jobs and set job
options.
Status Open the Status window where you
can monitor device, client and job sta-
tus and view operator messages.
Media management Open the Media window where you
can view details on media items.
Job management Open the Job window where informa-
tion is stored about jobs, their status
and job histories.
Logs Open the Log window where you can
access log files.
Administration Client Management Open the Client Management window
where you can view and find informa-
tion on the NetVault Clients and Avail-
able NetVault Machines.
Domain Management Open the Domain Management win-
dow where you can view and find infor-
mation on the Controlled Servers and
Available NetVault Servers.
Device Management Open the Device Management window
where you can view logs and media
requests for your devices.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 45

Choose this
Menu To do this:
command:
Policy Management Opens the Policy Management win-
dow where you can define sets of
options for schedules, target media
and advanced options (backup life,
compression, verification, duplication
and pre and post scripting).
Help Help Contents Display a description of and help for
the current focus item.
Help Index Display the Help Index.
About Open the About dialog box showing
product version number and license
information.

Command Toolbar
The command toolbar, when displayed, is located directly below the menu bar in the
NetVault interface and consists of shortcut buttons providing access to commonly
used commands. These shortcut buttons can be displayed in two sizes: the small
buttons on the command toolbar or as large buttons in the interface.
The display of the command toolbar can be turned on or off by choosing the View
Toolbar command. The display of the large command buttons is turned on or off by
choosing the View Large Buttons command.
The NetVault command toolbar (small buttons) appears as shown in the following
figure:

The NetVault GUI (large buttons) appears as shown:


46 Chapter 3
NetVault Basics

The shortcut buttons, accessible from either the command toolbar or the large
buttons, are described in the following table:
Click this
For this command:
button
Operations Backup

Operations Restore

Administration Client Management

Administration Device Management

Operations Status

Operations Media Management

Operations Job Management

Operations Logs

Status Line
The Status Line, located at the bottom of the NetVault window, displays a description
of the command over which the cursor is currently placed.
An example of the information displayed when the cursor hovers over the Media
Management command button, is shown in the following figure:

Managing Devices and Clients


The NetVault interface includes windows which allow you to manage your clients, domains
and devices. This section gives a brief description of the windows used to manage the
devices, clients and client domains.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 47

Device Management Window


All backup devices (including simple tape drives, tape libraries, disk-based pseudo-
libraries, CD Writers, Optical Drives, etc.) are controlled by a NetVault server.
Devices can be attached directly to the NetVault server computer or be distributed
among the clients of the NetVault server. The NetVault Device Management
window provides the means to control the devices on the servers.
The NetVault Device Management window opens when you click the Device
Management button on the command toolbars or choose the Administration
Device Management command, and is shown in the following figure:

The options available on the NetVault Device Management window are:


n Server Selection: A list of servers.
n Devices: Lists the devices currently controlled by the selected NetVault
server. Devices you intend to control through the NetVault Device
Management window must be added by choosing one of the Add commands.
The Devices tab provides access to Library and Drive commands used to
check status, modify libraries, remove devices, check drives, and other
functions used in managing the devices.
n Device Logs: A list of the log messages recorded for activity on the devices
which were or are currently under the control of the selected NetVault server.
n Media Requests: Contains all currently active requests for media. Once a
media request is filled as part of an active job, the media request is removed.
For complete information on using the Device Management window, see Working
with the Device Management Window (page 64).
48 Chapter 3
NetVault Basics

Client Management Window


The NetVault Client Management window allows you to monitor, control and add
NetVault Clients which are controlled by a NetVault server.
The NetVault Client Management window opens when you click the Client
Management button on the command toolbars or choose the Administration Client
Management command, and is shown in the following figure:

The options available in the NetVault Client Management window are:


n Server Selection: A list of servers.
n Clients: An alphabetically ordered list of the current NetVault clients for the
NetVault server selected in the Server Selection box.
n Available NetVault Machines: A list of the currently known NetVault
machines on the network and their current status: blue if available, red if
unavailable.
n Find NetVault Machine: Allows you to search for a NetVault machine not
currently listed in the Available NetVault Machines list. With this search you
can find machines located on another network connected by a router, bridge or
gateway to the local network.
For complete information on using the Client Management window, see Working with
the Device Management Window (page 64).

Domain Management Window


In NetVault network management, a single machine is configured as a NetVault
server with one or more NetVault clients assigned to it. The server and its clients
comprise a NetVault Domain.
A server can be administered from the machine running the server software or from a
remote workstation. Many servers can be administered from a central location, thus
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 49

providing a Domain Management facility. This facility requires the installation of a


NetVault GUI.
The NetVault Domain Management window opens when you choose the
Administration Domain Management command, as shown in the following figure:

The NetVault Domain Management window is similar to the NetVault Client


Management window. The options available in the window are:
n Available NetVault Servers: The list of currently known NetVault servers on
the network and their current status: blue if available, red if unavailable. With
proper security, a server may be added as a Controlled Server.
n Controlled Servers: The list of all NetVault servers which may be controlled
from the selected server and their current status: blue if available, red if
unavailable. With proper security, a Controlled Server can be added from the
Available NetVault Servers frame.
n Find NetVault Machine: Allows you to search for a NetVault Server machine
not currently listed in the Available NetVault Servers frame. Use this facility
to find machines on another network connected by a router, bridge or gateway
to the local network.
For more information on using the Domain Management window, see The NetVault
Domain Management Window (page 117).

Managing Media
An important part of performing backups and restores for your data is being able to manage
the media used to store the data, as well as schedule and run the backup and restore jobs.
NetVault provides the windows used to supervise the performance of your media. This
section describes those windows.
50 Chapter 3
NetVault Basics

Media Management Window


The NetVault Media Management window provides access to information about the
media associated with the selected server.
The NetVault Media Management window opens when you click the Media
Management button on the command toolbars or choose the Operations Media
Management command, as shown in the following figure:

The options available on the NetVault Media Management window are:


n Server Selection: A list of servers.
n Media: The list of media and backup savesets on the selected server.
n Details: The tabs appearing in the Details frame vary, depending on the item
selected in the Media frame.
For selected media the tabs can include Details, Statistics, History, Library Info
and Media Requests. Each tab provides details specific to the media such as
location, space used, segments used and date written. When a job is active it
also provides information used to administer media requests.
When a backup saveset is selected, the tabs displayed are Backup, Segment 1
and Segment 2. Information displayed for a selected backup saveset can
include the name of the server which controlled the backup, the name of the
client the data was backed up from, the type of backup performed and more.
For more information see Media Management (page 127).

Status Window
The NetVault Server Status window displays information on the current status of the
selected server.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 51

The NetVault Jobs window opens when you click the Status button on the
command toolbars or choose the Operations Status command. The information in
the NetVault Server Status window is divided into individual, sizable areas, as
shown in the following figure:

The areas in the NetVault Server Status window are:


n Device Status: Displays the availability and state of each device on the
NetVault server.
n Client Status: Displays the state of each NetVault client on the NetVault
server.
n Job Status: Displays the state of each job controlled by the NetVault server.
n Operator Messages: Displays all messages for jobs controlled by the
NetVault server.
For complete information on using the Server Status window, see The NetVault
Server Status Window (page 141).

Backing Up Data
The NetVault Backup window is where you select the data you want to back up, set backup
and advanced options, choose the target media and schedule backup jobs.
52 Chapter 3
NetVault Basics

Backup Window
The NetVault Backup window allows you to create, edit and submit backup jobs for
NetVault clients. NetVault backup jobs transfer data from the NetVault client to a
backup device whose media stores the data. The backed up data is then available to
be restored to the originating client.
The NetVault Backup window opens when you click the Backup button on the
command toolbars or choose the Operations Backup command, as shown in the
following figure:

Each of the tabs in the NetVault Backup window controls the functions and options
available for backup jobs. Complete information on using the NetVault Backup
window can be found in Backing Up Data (page 157).
n Selections: Allows you to select the data you want included in the backup job.
For more information on how to select specific data, see Searching for Data
(page 57).
n Backup Options: Backup options vary, depending on the plugin or APM
selection. These options control whether you do a full, differential or
incremental backup, and if differential or incremental, specify the data you want
to include.
n Schedule: Provides the option to specify when backup jobs are run, whether
they are run only once or are repeated at certain intervals, and whether they
can be triggered to run by a command.
n Target: Allows you to specify a particular device or media on which the data
will be backed up.
n Advanced Options: Includes the option to set backup life, data compression,
verification, duplication and pre and post scripting. Additional information on
the Advanced Options is in Using Advanced Features (page 271).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 53

Restoring Backed Up Data


To recover backed up data, use the Restore window to select the data to be restored, set
restore and advanced options, choose the target client and schedule the restore job.

Restore Window
The NetVault Restore window allows you to create, edit and submit restore jobs for
NetVault clients. NetVault restore jobs transfer data from a backup device whose
media stores the data to the NetVault client.
The NetVault Restore window opens when you click the Restore button on the
command toolbars or choose the Operations Restore command, as shown in the
following example:

Each of the tabs in the NetVault Restore window controls the functions and options
available for backup jobs. Complete information on using the Restore window can
be found in Restoring Data (page 197).
n Selections: Allows you to select the data you want included in the restore job.
For more information on how to select specific data, see Searching for Data
(page 57).
n Restore Options: Restore options vary, depending on the plugin or APM
selection. These options control whether a restore job can overwrite existing
data, create backup files or change date and time stamps.
n Target Client: Allows you to select the client where you want the data to be
restored.
54 Chapter 3
NetVault Basics

n Schedule: Provides the option to specify when backup jobs are run, whether
they are run only once or are repeated at certain intervals, and whether they
can be triggered to run by a command.
n Advanced Options: Includes the option to set backup life, data compression,
verification, duplication and pre and post scripting. Additional information on
the Advanced Options is in Using Advanced Features (page 271).

Job Operations
The NetVault Jobs window allows you to monitor the performance of and schedules for your
backup and restore jobs. This same window also gives you access to historical job
information for completed jobs.
The Logs window is available to view job logs created during backup and restore job
operations. The job logs record what happened while the job was running, including
operation messages issued and any warnings or errors that may have occurred. With the job
logs, problems can be identified and corrected before the same circumstances are applied to
new jobs.

Jobs Window
The NetVault Jobs window contains information relevant to jobs submitted by the
NetVault server that are completed, running and scheduled to run. The Job Manager
runs on the NetVault server to monitor plugins and device managers on other
machines to complete a task.
The NetVault Jobs window opens when you click the Job Management button on
the command toolbars or choose the Operations Job Management command, as
shown in the following figure:

The options available on the NetVault Jobs window are:


NetVault Administrator’s Guide 55

n Status: The Status tab lists the completed, running and scheduled jobs.
Running and scheduled jobs can be controlled by choosing different
commands in the pop-up menus. Completed jobs can be viewed and edited.
Scheduled jobs can be viewed, edited, deleted from the schedule and placed
on hold. You can also monitor, view, edit and abort running jobs.
n Jobs: Displays the list of jobs in the NetVault database. Jobs listed here do
not have to be active; a series of jobs can be created, saved with different
names and submitted later.
n History: The list of all jobs that have been run.
For more information on using the Jobs window, see Job Management (page 239).

Logs Window
The NetVault server centralizes all logs in a NetVault domain, assuring that the logs
from the server and the clients are gathered in a single location. The NetVault
logging utility pre-allocates disk space for the log storage so that logging continues
even if the system runs low on disk space.
The NetVault Logs window opens when you click the Logs button on the command
toolbars or choose the Operations Logs command, as shown in the following
figure:

Operational logging for processes controlled by the selected NetVault server


selected are listed in the NetVault Logs window.
Logs can be filtered to display only those who meet specified filter options, such as
Warning Levels, date ranges, clients, etc.
For complete information on using the NetVault Logs window, see Using Logs (page
249).
56 Chapter 3
NetVault Basics

Using Templates
In most of the backup and restore jobs that you do, the same set of options can be applied.
The Policy Management window can be used to define and store sets of options that can be
re-used in many of your backup and restore jobs.

Policy Management Window


NetVault allows you to define and save templates that can be re-used in many
different backup or restore jobs. When modifications are required they can be done
in the saved template and automatically applied to the backup or restore jobs that
use that template. The templates you design and save are called Sets.
Sets are defined in the NetVault Backup, NetVault Restore and NetVault Policy
Management windows from the appropriate tabs. The following list shows the
available sets:
n Schedule Set: Defines the date and time the job is to run and whether it runs
once or repeats many times. This set can be applied to both Backup and
Restore jobs.
n Backup Selection Set: Used in selection of data to be backed up.
n Backup Target Set: Used to set the devices, media and general options for
the backup targets.
n Backup Advanced Options Set: Used to define the compression and pre and
post script options for a backup job.
n Restore Selection Set: Used in selection of backed up data to be restored.
n Restore Advanced Options Set: Used to define the compression and script
options for a restore job.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 57

The NetVault Policy Management window is opened by choosing the


Administration Policy Management command, and appears as shown in the
following example with the Schedule tab displayed:

At the bottom of each tab you can name and save a Set of options and load, modify
and delete a Set you previously saved. For more information on using Save Sets
and working with the Policy Management window, see Using Policy (Set) Templates
(page 263).

Searching for Data


Whenever data has been backed up, it can be restored. The Search facility allows you to
find the backed up data at the client, plugin and backup saveset levels.
When you select a Client, Plugin or backup saveset, right-click and choose Search from the
popup menu, the Restore Search window opens, as shown in the following figure:

In the Restore Search dialog box, you can specify a string of characters in the Search
String box that must be present in the backed up data you want to find, use a Regular
Expression Search and search for Case Sensitive characters. In addition, wildcard
characters can be used to expand the results of your search.
For more information on Regular Expressions, see Using Regular Expressions (page 315).
58 Chapter 3
NetVault Basics

Selecting Items
By carefully selecting the items you want to backup or restore, you can reduce the time it
takes to run the backup and restore jobs and, subsequently, minimize the time data is
unavailable to your users.
Items are selected or cleared by clicking a square located to the left of the item.
The following example shows how the individual items in a Microsoft SQL Database Backup
are included or excluded by selection:

n The green check next to the master item indicates that the entire database is selected.
When the green check is present at this level, all sub-items are automatically selected.
n The red X next to the spt_datatype_info and spt_datatype_info_ext items indicates that
these items are excluded from the selection.
When selecting items, it is important to remember:
n A selection at the top, or master, level automatically selects all its sub-items and
indicates the selection with a green check.
n If the master level is opened, and all sub-items selected, then the master item is
automatically selected.
n When the master level is selected (making all sub-items selected), individual sub-items
can be excluded by clicking the green check box. The now excluded sub-item is
indicated with a red X.
n If the master level is opened but not selected, individual items not selected are indicated
by the blank square.
CHAPTER 4

Device and Library Management


What are NetVault Devices? - 61
n Device Types - 61
n Device Connections - 61
n Devices in a Windows NT Environment - 63
n Shared Devices - 63
n Setting up a Device - 63
n Planning a Shared Device Installation - 61
Working with the Device Management Window - 64
n Menu Bar - 64
n Window Tabs - 65
n Icons and Drive Lights - 65
n The Devices Tab - 66
n The Device Logs Tab - 71
n The Media Requests Tab - 72
Adding NetVault Devices - 77
n Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client - 77
n Adding Libraries - 81
n Adding a Shared Library - 87
n Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients - 91
n Adding Devices in Windows 2000 - 92
n Working with Firewalls - 94
n Creating Virtual Libraries - 94
Scanning Drives and Media - 94
n Scanning for Shared Drives - 94
n Scanning Media - 95
Working with Cleaning Drives/Slots - 97
n Configuring Cleaning Drives/Slots - 97
n Checking Status on Cleaning Drives/Slots - 98
n Setting the Life of Cleaning Media - 100
n Setting an Automatic Cleaning Interval - 100
n Manually Cleaning Media - 101
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 61

What are NetVault Devices?


A NetVault device is any single piece of equipment designated to store the data you need to
preserve or backup.
NetVault is designed to use a wide variety of storage devices from single drives (including
disk, tape and DVD-RAM) to libraries of the same in any combination. The majority of
NetVault devices use the SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface) standard, and in most
cases, a device is automatically recognized as it is added. Most devices use tape media, but
NetVault also works well with disk-based and optical media.
NetVault device templates simplify the way devices are added under any operating system
where NetVault is installed.

Device Types
NetVault devices fall into two categories:
n Simple Devices: Normally a single drive device requiring manual intervention
to change media.
n Libraries: Libraries can be configured as single-drive, random tape libraries
(stackers), multi-drive (random) tape libraries (jukeboxes), sequential devices,
autochangers, autoloaders, disk libraries, etc.

Device Connections
NetVault devices are controlled by a NetVault server. They can be attached directly
to the NetVault server or distributed across the clients of the server. These devices
are known as Client Transfer Nodes (CTN). Multi-drive devices can be completely
controlled by one NetVault server/client or shared among more than one NetVault
server/client.

Planning a Shared Device Installation


DirecSan™ devices are NetVault devices (e.g. tape drives) that can be shared
between two or more machines using shared-SCSI or a SAN (Storage Area
Network) connection. In this section you will learn how to set up a simple shared-
SCSI device between two machines, and how to use a SAN connection.

Setting up Simple Shared-SCSI Devices (2 machines)


The simplest way to set up shared devices between two machines is to use
standard SCSI cabling. The information provided here is a general guide only and
subject to change. For the latest information, please contact Technical Support
(page 6).
62 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

Requirements for using shared-SCSI include:


n The two machines must be physically close enough to each other so that the
maximum recommended cable lengths for the type of SCSI cabling in use and
number of connections are not exceeded.
n The two machines must be running a main operating system supported by
NetVault (i.e. Microsoft Windows NT, or most versions of UNIX). Note that the
two machines DO NOT have to be running the SAME operating system.
n Each machine must contain a suitable SCSI ID configured to each SCSI
Adapter Card.
n The device(s) to be used (either Standalone Drive or Library) must have SCSI
IN and OUT connectors. Note that stackers, jukeboxes and autochangers are
all classed as Libraries by NetVault.
n The SCSI cabling is set up to 'daisy-chain' between the SCSI Adapter Card on
one machine, via all of the device SCSI connections, to the SCSI Adapter Card
on the second machine.
n Each machine must have either NetVault client or NetVault server software
installed and the NetVault License purchased must allow for the required
number of Client Attached (distributed) Devices.
Note the following information:
n Each standalone or library drive can be added as shared by both machines, or
or be configured for exclusive use by one machine.
n Each drive is seen as a local drive to the NetVault machine to which it is added.
n A library robotic arm connection must be added by NetVault to only one of the
two machines.
Once the hardware device(s) and NetVault software installation is complete, the
shared device(s) can be added to the NetVault Device Management window, by
choosing either the Add Standalone Drive or Add Library commands.
For more information on adding standalone, shared devices, see Adding a Shared
Standalone Drive to a Client (page 77). Information on adding shared devices is
available in Adding Libraries (page 81).

Using a SAN (Storage Area Network)


NetVault’s DirecSan™ (Dynamic Drive Sharing) combines the ability to attach
devices to clients (Client Transfer Nodes - CTN) with SAN connections, providing
centralized tape storage and the sharing of drives (Shared CTN) within the SAN.
Once the SAN has been set up, the shared device(s) can be added to the NetVault
Device Management window, by choosing either the Add Standalone Drive or Add
Library command, as appropriate.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 63

Refer to Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client (page 77) or Adding Libraries
(page 81).

Devices in a Windows NT Environment


NetVault works with the standard NT system drivers installed, but it is
recommended that fast tape drive devices be placed under NetVault’s own NT
drivers. You must assure that the SCSI addresses are correctly recognized by the
BIOS and later NT when the machine is started or rebooted.
To check for system drivers installed under NT 4.0:
1. Choose Start>Settings>Control Panel.
2. Double-click the Tape Devices icon to open the Tape Devices dialog box,
shown in the following figure:

The list of tape devices installed in your system is displayed.


3. Click the Drivers tab to display the tape device drivers on your system.
4. Select all of the drivers to be removed and click the Remove button.

Shared Devices
NetVault devices can be shared between two or more machines using shared-
SCSI, a SAN or DirecSan connection using standalone drives and drives in a
library.
A shared drive can be used by NetVault as a local drive while backing up the client.
This allows data to be efficiently transferred via the network. Even if a drive is
physically shared between two or more machines, it can be added to NetVault for
exclusive use by one machine, or shared by specific, connected machines.

Setting up a Device
Before you can start using NetVault, at least one device must be added. NetVault
can use various types of media including tape and DVD-RAM for simple devices
64 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

and libraries, and hard disks set up as pseudo tape libraries. Once a device is added,
it appears in the NetVault Device Management window. Before trying to add a SCSI
tape device to NetVault, make sure that it is recognized by your operating system.

NOTE: DVD-RAM devices are slow when writing to them. To improve this
process, NetVault compresses data before writing by default. This can be
turned off in the Device Management window if desired

Working with the Device Management Window


The Device Management window provides access to all the commands and functions
needed to manage your NetVault devices.
To open the Device Management window, click the Device Management button on the
command toolbars or choose the Administration Device Management command, and is
shown in the following figure:

Options available in the window are:

Menu Bar
The Device Management menu bar, shown in the following figure, provides access
to the NetVault functions and operations.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 65

The commands available in each menu item are detailed in the following table:
Choose this
Menu To do this:
command:
File Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box
where you can select the desired
printer and specify its properties.
Print Open the Print dialog box where you
can choose the desired printer and
properties before printing.
Close Close the window.
Add Add Library Add a library.
Add Standalone Drive Add a standalone drive.
View Devices Open the Devices tab.
Device Logs Open the Device Logs tab.
Media Requests Open the Media Requests tab.
Help Current Topic Display help on the current topic.
Help Contents Open the help system.

Window Tabs
Information available in each of the tabs in the Device Management window is
described in the following table:
Window Tab Provides Information about:
Devices The control functions for all devices currently controlled by the
NetVault server. For devices to be controlled in this area, they
must be added with the Add commands.
Device Logs Log messages for devices which are, or have been, under the
control of the selected NetVault server.
Media Currently active requests for media. Once the media request
Requests has been satisfied as part of the job progress, the media
request is removed.

Icons and Drive Lights


Each item listed in the Devices tab of the Device Management window is displayed
with a picture indicating specific information about the item. NetVault uses a
66 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

combination of icons and colored lights that explain device types and status, as
explained in the following tables:
Icons Provides Information about:
Library - with status indicating light of green if functional.

Drive - with status indicating light (see Drive Lights table below
for explanations).
Slot - Library media slot (with media identity, unless empty).

Port - Entry/Exit port enabling media to be imported or


exported without opening the main library door.

Drive Lights Provides Information about:


Green Light - The drive is available and not in use.

Yellow Light - The drive is currently in use.

Red Light - The drive is not available, and there could be a


problem with it.

The Devices Tab


The Devices Tab lists the libraries, drives and entry/exit ports for the selected server:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 67

Pop-up Menu Commands


The pop-up menu commands in the Devices tab of the Device Management window
vary, depending on the item selected: library, drive or entry/exit port.
Each of the tables below describe the commands for the item selections:
Library Commands
This Library
Does this:
Command
Status Opens a simple Status dialog box for the library, showing its
name, machine and whether or not it is online.
Modify Opens the Modify Library window where library configurations
can be modified.
Remove Removes a selected library or simple drive from Device Man-
(Device) agement upon confirmation.
Open Door Opens the main door of the library. When the selected door is
open, this command changes to Door Closed. The Door
Closed command is used to hand the library back to NetVault
control.
Open Entry/ Physically removes media from or adds media to the Entry/Exit
Exit Port. When the Open Entry/Exit command is chosen, this
menu item changes to Entry/Exit Closed. The Entry/Exit
Closed command is used to hand the library back to NetVault
control.
Door Closed Hands the library back to NetVault control. When NetVault
gets control it checks all media in the device before allowing
any other actions to be taken.
NOTE: With many libraries, choosing Door Closed will close
the door without having to close it in the device control panel.
Entry/Exit Hands the library back to NetVault control. With some (but not
Closed all) libraries, you can choose the Entry/Exit Closed command
to close the port without having to close it in the device control
panel.
68 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

This Library
Does this:
Command
Scan The Scan command causes NetVault to scan the selected
media to ensure that all backup savesets are recorded in the
NetVault database. This command can be used to import an
item of media from another NetVault device (marked FOR-
EIGN), including media previously in a device controlled by a
different NetVault Server (or controlled by a previous NetVault
Server installation on the same machine). No restores can be
performed from media while it is marked FOREIGN, it must be
scanned first.
For more information on scanning, see View the library and
drive configurations, make any necessary modifications and
click the Save details button to store the settings. (page 92).

Drive/Slot Commands
This Drive/Slot
Does this:
Command
Status Opens a Status dialog box for the drive with tabs containing: 1)
Details showing whether or not the drive is online and whether it
contains media, 2) Media Information indicating read/write
capacities, errors and times, 3) Library Info identifying the
library and the physical and logical slot positions, and 4) Clean-
ing describing date/time, data transferred, errors and time in
use since last cleaning (this tab appears only when a device is
designated for cleaning).
Load Loads the media in the slot into an available drive.
Check Causes the drive to self-test. Choosing the Check command
when a drive is showing a red indicator often makes the drive
available again. Useful for checking for media after it has been
loaded into a simple drive.
Clean Submits a request to NetVault to clean the selected drive; a
message confirming the clean cycle request appears. If the
request is not possible (i.e., the device is busy or offline, a
cleaning cartridge is unavailable, etc.) an appropriate message
is displayed.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 69

This Drive/Slot
Does this:
Command
Clean Opens the Cleaning Interval dialog box where you can set one
Properties or more of the following options to control when a drive is
cleaned: the number of days between cleaning cycles, the
amount of data transferred in gigabytes, the number of hours in
use, and the number of soft read/write errors encountered.
Life Opens the Cleaning Media Properties dialog box where you can
set the desired number of lives (or cleaning passes) for a clean-
ing device.
Configure Opens the Edit Drive dialog box where advanced configuration
settings can be changed to maximize drive performance for a
particular use and statistics gathered.
Re-use Enables the selected media to be re-used by NetVault after con-
firmation. When media is marked to be re-used, it can be over-
written by future backup jobs.
Blank Blanks a previously used media item after confirmation that you
will lose all data on the media.
Properties Allows you to view/edit labels for a selected media item (new or
re-used). Also allows you to view the current labels and tape for-
mat.
NOTE: It is not possible to change the label of media in use
without losing the data currently stored on it.
Export Transfers the selected media to the Entry/Exit Port so that it may
be removed from the library.
Unload Unloads the media from the drive to return it to its designated
slot. With a Simple Drive the media is ejected.
Media Status Opens a multi-tabbed dialog box containing comprehensive
information on the media status.
70 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

This Drive/Slot
Does this:
Command
Scan The Scan command causes NetVault to scan the selected
media to ensure that all backup savesets are recorded in the
NetVault database. This command can be used to import an
item of media from another NetVault device (marked FOR-
EIGN), including media previously in a device controlled by a dif-
ferent NetVault Server (or controlled by a previous NetVault
Server installation on the same machine). No restores can be
performed from media while it is marked FOREIGN, it must be
scanned first.
For more information on scanning, see View the library and
drive configurations, make any necessary modifications and
click the Save details button to store the settings. (page 92).

Entry/Exit Port Commands


This Port
Does this:
Command
Status Opens a Status dialog box for the drive with tabs containing: 1)
Details showing whether or not the drive is online and whether
it contains media, 2) Statistics indicating how much data was
read/written, how many errors were read/written and when the
data was read/written, and 3) Library Info identifying the
library and the physical and logical slot positions.
Unload Unloads the media from the drive to return it to its designated
slot. With a Simple Drive the media is ejected.
Media Status Opens a multi-tabbed dialog box containing comprehensive
information on the media status.
Scan The Scan command causes NetVault to scan the selected
media to ensure that all backup savesets are recorded in the
NetVault database. This command can be used to import an
item of media from another NetVault device (marked FOR-
EIGN), including media previously in a device controlled by a
different NetVault Server (or controlled by a previous NetVault
Server installation on the same machine). No restores can be
made from media while it is marked FOREIGN, it must be
scanned first.
For more information on scanning, see View the library and
drive configurations, make any necessary modifications and
click the Save details button to store the settings. (page 92).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 71

The Device Logs Tab


The Device Logs tab lists all log messages for the devices currently under control of
the selected NetVault server. An example of the Device Logs tab is shown in the
following figure:

Information available on the Device Logs tab include:


n Log Messages: The log messages listed here are also available in the
NetVault Logs window where a filter can be applied to select specific logs. For
more information on using the Logs command, see Using Logs (page 249).
n Warning Level: The color indicators used here are also used in the NetVault
Jobs window. See Using Logs (page 251) for more information.
n Exclamation Marks: An exclamation mark inside the warning level dot
indicates that additional information is available for the log message.
When the exclamation mark is inside the dot of a Backup job, and you double-
click it, the Transfer Information dialog box opens:
72 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

When you double-click an error dot, the View Log Context dialog box opens:

The Media Requests Tab


Media Request messages are displayed when a job is active. Normally, when a job
completes successfully, the Media Request disappears. If a problem is encountered,
the job is paused until the media request is fulfilled. For instance, a Media Requests
occurs when you have used Target Media during a backup job and the specified
media is not available to the device.
Media Requests are identified with both a Request number and the related Job
number. In addition, the Priority Number and any relevant message concerning the
media request is displayed.
The Media Requests tab is shown in the following figure:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 73

The commands available when you right-click a media request are described in the
following table:
Media Request
Does this:
Command
Status Opens the Media Request Status dialog box to view the statis-
tics of the job’s request for media. For more information, see
Media Request Status Dialog Box (page 73).
Diagnose Opens the Diagnose Media Request dialog box to view infor-
mation about how the media request is set up. For more infor-
mation, see
Put on Hold Places the job on hold.
Take off Hold Removes the hold, placing the job back in the queue.
Set Priority Opens the Set Request Priority dialog box where you can
change the priority level for the selected job, see Set Priority
Dialog Box (page 76). For more information on setting default
priority levels, see Setting Default Priorities (page 76).

Media Request Status Dialog Box


When a Media Request is selected, and the Status command chosen from the pop-
up menu, the Media Request Status dialog box opens:
74 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

The above example provides information for a backup job. Each item is explained in
the following table:
Information
Explanation
Item
Request The identifying number for the media request.
Request type Whether the media request is for a backup or a restore.
Status The current status of the job. This example shows that there is
No Suitable Media Available. This could mean that the Target
Media is not in the device.
Priority The priority assigned to the media request.
Job The related Job Number.
Requesting The NetVault machine requesting the media.
Machine
Drives Specifies which drive(s) the media request applies to. In this
example, the backup may only use a library drive (the DLT
drive within the Exabyte EXB-210), so only this library drive is
listed.
Media Specifies which media the media request applies to. In this
example, the backup targeted specific media - New DLT Tape
4. This is the Media Label (MID) of the media which is required
for the backup.
Re-use media Allows you to designate the selected media for re-use.
Required Details the setting of Backup - Target, General Options setting
amount of Specify minimum space required on media before backup.
media In this example, this parameter is not set.
Force first Details whether or not the Backup - Target, General Options
backup setting Ensure this backup is the first on the media was
specified.
Label Details whether or not the Backup - Target, Media Options
automatically option Automatically label new or reused media was turned
on.
Mark media Details whether or not the Backup - Target, General Options
read-only on option Protect media from further writes after backup was
completion turned on.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 75

Information
Explanation
Item
Use media Under normal circumstances, this parameter is set to Default,
format meaning that any media format can be used. When a media
format is specified (i.e., MTF), and a backup needs to span
more than one item of media, if the first item of media uses
MTF, then all others must also use MTF. A backup job cannot
use mixed media formats.
Return media This parameter applies only to media in libraries. If the Library
to slot on Return inactive media to slot delay parameter is set (in the
completion Add Library - Configure dialog box or by choosing the Config-
ure command on a selected library), the parameter specified is
displayed here.
Force local Currently not available.
drive
Network Details whether or not the Backup - Advanced Options, Com-
Compression pression setting Network Compression has been specified.

Diagnose Media Request Dialog Box


When a Media Request is selected, and the Diagnose command chosen from the
pop-up menu, the Diagnose Media Request dialog box opens:

The above example provides information for a backup job. Each item is explained in
the table in Media Request Status Dialog Box (page 73).
76 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

Set Priority Dialog Box


When a Media Request is selected, and the Set Priority command chosen from the
pop-up menu, the Set Priority dialog box opens:

The Set Priority dialog box allows you to change the priority of the selected job.
NetVault backup and restore jobs are run in order of priority. Decrease the priority of
a job to move it forward in the queue.

Setting Default Priorities


Default priority values are set in the NetVault Configurator, and are as follows:
Priority
Types of Priorities
Number
Restore Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 20
Continuation Restore Request Priority Boost 5
Backup Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 30
Continuation Backup Request Priority Boost 5
Label Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10
Blank Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10
The following information applies to the types of priorities:
n For Restore, Backup, Label and Blank requests, 1 is the highest level and 0
runs the request in the background.
n A Continuation request occurs when an unfinished Restore or Backup job
requires more than one piece of media to complete successfully. It is possible
for a job paused for media changes to be pre-empted by another request. In
order to allow the original Restore or Backup request to continue without
interruption, set the priority number of the continuation Restore or Backup to a
smaller number than that of other requests.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 77

Adding NetVault Devices


This section includes instructions on how to add devices to NetVault. You will learn how to
plan and add a shared standalone device, search for shared devices and add a shared
library.

Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client


This section teaches you how to add a standalone drive connected to two or more
clients to NetVault.
The example used here demonstrates how to add a single Quantum DLT 7000 drive
to two clients (rabbit and pinky). These two clients are connected to the drive via
shared-SCSI. One of the clients is running Windows NT while the other is running
the Sun Solaris operating system. The rabbit client is the NetVault Server for this
NetVault Domain.
The NetVault Server (rabbit) has no added devices when you begin, and no backup
jobs can be run.
To add a drive, follow these steps:
1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the Device
Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the
Administration Device Management command, as shown in the following
figure:
78 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

2. Choose Add>Add Standalone Drive to open the Add Standalone Drive


window, shown in the following figure:

The Add Standalone Drive window contains these options:


n Choose Drives: A list of the devices already connected to or available to be
connected to the NetVault client.
n Selected Drives - Displays a photograph of the added device, or a photograph
of the generic type, as listed in the Type field.
n Details: Displays a basic description of the device’s capabilities.
n Save details button: Click this button to store the added device.
n Remove Drive: Click this button to delete a selected drive.
n File Menu: Accesses the Save, Print Setup, Print and Close commands.
n Help Menu: Opens the help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page.
3. Select the client rabbit, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu.

The available standalone drives for the client are displayed in the Choose
Drives list. The SCSI ID and device string for the drive are displayed.
4. Select the desired drive, right-click and choose Add Shared from the pop-up
menu. If this is the first client selection for this drive only, choose Select to add
the drive to the drive bay.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 79

The drive has been added for the first client. Normally the picture displayed in
the Selected Drives frame and the information in the Type box match your
drive.
5. Add the same drive to the second client using one of the following methods:
n Manually add the drive as shared for an additional client. Select an additional
NetVault client physically connected to this drive via shared-SCSI or a SAN,
right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu. The drive is listed under
the selected client.
n Let NetVault automatically add all shared drives.
6. Right-click the drive and choose Add Shared from the pop-up menu:
80 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

The drive has been added to the second client, as shown in the following figure:

NOTE: You can manually add a drive to any number of clients connected to it.

7. Select the Standalone Drive and right-click to open the pop-up menu. The
commands available are:
n Configure: Click the Configure tab or select the desired drive, right-click and
choose Configure from the pop-up menu to access the Configuration settings.
For this example, there are no configuration settings.
n Scan for shared drives: Choose Scan for shared drives from the pop-up
menu to automatically detect and add any other clients sharing the drive. See
Scanning for Shared Drives (page 94) for more information.
If you select a drive, the pop-up menu adds the Remove command so that the
selected drive can be deleted.
8. Enter a suitable Device Name in the box. You cannot use a default name when
a drive is shared.

9. After viewing the configuration, and changing any options as necessary, save
the settings for the added device by clicking the Save details button.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 81

The NetVault - Information dialog box message appears:

The new drive appears in the NetVault Device Management window and starts
to initialize. At first the drive containing media is displayed with UNKNOWN for
the media and the yellow drive light, indicating it is being checked by NetVault.
After the media has been checked, the drive light turns green.
New media, or media previously blanked, is listed as BLANK.
Media already in use under NetVault is listed with the Media Label it has been
allocated. This will be prefixed with FOREIGN: if it is not known by your current
NetVault database; if you wish to use this media, you will need to scan it. For
information on scanning for shared devices, see Scanning for Shared Drives
(page 94).
Media which has been used under NetVault 5 will be marked as NetVault5 NT
(or other OS).
Media Formatted in some other manner will normally be marked as OTHER.

Adding Libraries
All Libraries to be controlled by a NetVault server are added via the Add Library
window. A library can be added to the NetVault server itself as a client, or when
using the Client Transfer Node facility, to a NetVault client controlled by the
NetVault server.
The example below explains how to add an Exabyte 18D Library, with single
Quantum DLT 4000 drive, to a NetVault Client (richard) which is also the NetVault
server.
Before adding the device, the NetVault server does not have any devices added (so
no backup can be run).
To add a library:
1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the Device
Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the
Administration Device Management command.
82 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

2. Choose Add Library to open the Add Library window, shown in the following
figure:

The Add Library window contains the following options:


n Library Selection tab: Displays the list of NetVault clients to which libraries
are connected, and shows the libraries available to be added.
n Drive Selection tab: Displays the list of NetVault clients to which drives are
connected, and shows the drives available to be added. The correct drive for
each library drive bay must be selected.
n Configure tab: Displays an overview of the complete library configuration and
allows additional configuration to be set up using library (arm changer) and
drive pop-up menus.
n Save details: Stores the Library configuration modifications.
3. Select the client having the Library you want to add (for this example, select the
richard client).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 83

4. Right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu, shown in the following
example, or double-click the client.

The available libraries for the client are displayed in the Choose Device frame.
NetVault normally displays the SCSI ID and device string for the library (arm
changer).
5. Select the library, right-click and choose Select from the pop-up menu.
The library picture, Type and Details are displayed in the Selected Library
frame and the library (arm changer mechanism) is selected.

6. Click the Drive Selection tab.


7. Select the NetVault Client (richard) in the Choose Drives frame.
84 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

8. Right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu to display the libraries
available to be added to the selected NetVault server’s control.

9. Display the list of drives available to be added to the selected server’s control by
choosing the Open command from the pop-up menu for the selected NetVault
Client.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 85

10. Select the desired drive, right-click and choose Select from the pop-up menu:

IMPORTANT: If a library has more than one drive, the correct drive bay for
each drive must be selected in the Select for drive bay box before selecting
the drive to be added. In the example above, only one of the four drives fitted
to this library is connected by SCSI, so only one SCSI Tape drive appears.

The drive is now added. The equipment picture in the Selected Drives frame
and the Type will match the particular library. For a library with multiple drives,
repeat the last step for each drive you want to add.

IMPORTANT: When adding multiple drives to a library, the drive order is


critical. Make sure the correct drive bays are used for each added drive.
86 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

11. Click the Configure tab or select the library (arm changer) and/or drive(s), right-
click and choose Configure from the pop-up menu, as shown in the following
figure:

12. Click the Save Details button to save the library configuration.
The NetVault - Information dialog box displays a message that the library was
added:

The new library is displayed in the NetVault Device Management window and
initialization is begun. At first, only the library and drive(s) are displayed. As each
slot is initialized it is shown with a media of UNKNOWN.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 87

Other media types are:


n Blank: New media or media previously blank.
n Foreign: Media already used under NetVault is displayed with the Media
Label it has been allocated. This will be prefixed with FOREIGN: if it is not
known by your current NetVault database; if you wish to use this media, you
will need to scan it.
n NetVault5 NT (or other OS): Media used under NetVault 5.
n Other: Media formatted in some other manner.
Adding a Shared Library
This section demonstrates how a Shared Library (Dynamic Drive Sharing) using a
library with the arm-changer under the control of one client, but with one or more
drive(s) connected to two clients, is added to NetVault.
In this example, an ADIC FastStore Library, with a single Quantum DLT 7000 drive
fitted, is added to two clients (rabbit and pinky). These two clients are connected to
the device via shared-SCSI and are running different operating systems (Microsoft
Windows NT and Sun Solaris, respectively). Note that the client rabbit is the
NetVault server for this NetVault domain.
Before adding the device, the NetVault server (rabbit) does not have any devices
added, so no backups can be run.
DirecSan™, NetVault’s Shared Client Transfer Node (SCTN) also uses this feature
to support centralized tap library/device sharing when attached to a SAN.

Adding Library and Drive(s) for the First Client (rabbit)


1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the Device
Management button on the command toolbars by choosing the Administration
Device Management command.
88 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

2. Open Add Library to open the Add Library window:

3. Select the first client (rabbit) which will control the Library Armchanger.
4. Choose Open from the pop-up menu.
The available libraries for the client are displayed in the Choose Library frame.
NetVault displays the SCSI ID and device string for the library (arm changer).
5. Select the library, right-click and choose Select from the pop-up menu, shown in
the following figure:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 89

The Library (arm changer mechanism) is selected. The library picture, Type and
Details are displayed in the Selected Library window.

6. Click the Drive Selection tab.


7. Select the NetVault client in the Choose Drives frame of the Drive Selection
tab.
8. Right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu to display the libraries
available to be added to the selected NetVault server’s control.
9. Select the NetVault client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu
to display the drives available to be added to the selected NetVault server’s
control.

IMPORTANT: If a library has more than one drive, the correct drive bay for
each drive must be selected in the Select for drive bay box before selecting
the drive to be added. In the example above, only one of the four drives fitted
to this library is connected by SCSI, so only one Scsi Tape drive appears.
90 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

10. Select the desired drive in the Choose Drives frame of the Drive Selection tab,
right-click and choose Add Shared from the pop-up menu, as shown in the
following figure:

If this is the first client selection for this drive only, choose Select to add the drive
to the drive bay.
The drive has been added for the first client. Note that the picture under
Selected Drives, and the information shown in the Type box, match your
particular library. For a library with multiple drives, repeat the last step for each
library drive to be added to the first client.

WARNING: When adding multiple drives to a library, the drive order is


critical. Make sure the correct drive bays are used for each added drive.

11. Add the same drive to the second client using one of the following methods:
n Manually add the drive as shared for an additional client. Select a NetVault
client physically connected to this drive via shared-SCSI or SAN, right-click and
choose Open from the pop-up menu. The drive appears under this client.
Continue this procedure with the steps in Manually Adding Shared Drives for
Other Clients (page 91).
n Let NetVault add all shared drives automatically. Continue with this procedure
using the steps in Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients (page 91).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 91

View the library and drive configurations, make any necessary modifications
and click Save to store the settings.

Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients


1. Make sure that the correct drive bay is selected in the Select for drive bay box.
2. Select the drive, right-click and choose Add Shared, as shown in the following
figure:

The drive is added to the second client, as shown in the following figure:
92 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

NOTE: You can manually add a drive to as many clients as are connected to
it.

3. Click the Configure tab or select the library (arm changer) and/or drive(s), right-
click and choose Configure to change the configuration settings:

4. View the library and drive configurations, make any necessary modifications and
click the Save details button to store the settings.

Adding Devices in Windows 2000


Devices or libraries being added to a Windows 2000 operating system cannot be
under the control of the Windows 2000 Remote Storage Manager.
To remove the library from the RSM control, follow these steps:
1. Right-click My Computer on your desktop.
2. Choose Manage from the pop-up menu, as shown in the following figure:

3. Double-click each level in the tree to display the desired device.


NetVault Administrator’s Guide 93

4. Right-click the device and choose Properties as shown in the following


example, to open the Properties dialog box:

5. In the Properties dialog box, clear the Enable library option as shown in the
following figure:
94 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

6. Click Apply and then OK to exit the dialog box.

Working with Firewalls


NetVault provides the ability to identify ports through which data can be transferred
across a secured network firewall. Simply enter a comma or dash-separated list of
valid port ID’s in the Valid Ports for Devices box on the Fire Wall tab of the NetVault
Configurator. The port identification must be configured on the machines with
attached devices.

Creating Virtual Libraries


Your NetVault installation CD includes software that allows you to create virtual
libraries and associated disk devices. Appendix E, Creating Virtual Libraries (page
329), contains information on how to load the software and then create the library.

Scanning Drives and Media


NetVault provides a scanning feature to help you find and add shared drives as well as find
media that you can use to import from a different server. This section explains each of these
functions.

Scanning for Shared Drives


After a drive has been added, you can direct NetVault to find and add all shared
drives for the library. To do so:
1. Select the desired library.
2. Right-click and choose Scan for shared drives from the pop-up menu:

The NetVault - Working dialog box informs you that NetVault is scanning.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 95

Please wait while the scanning function completes. You would NOT normally
click Cancel. When the scan is complete, a message appears indicating that
the scan is complete:

When NetVault machines with this device attached are found, they are
displayed in the NetVault Working dialog box. In the above example, a machine
identified as /dev/nvscsi/SCTL020 (HP C1533A) was found.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box.
4. Click the Configure tab to view the clients that can control the drive(s).

Clients that control drives

5. After viewing the configuration, and changing any options as necessary, save
the settings by clicking the Save details button.

Scanning Media
If you want to import NetVault media from a different NetVault server (or a previous
installation of your current NetVault server), you may do so using the Scan function.
The Scan function is also useful when you encounter problems with your media.
You may be advised that the media needs scanning on the Details tab of the Media
Properties dialog box.
To scan media:
1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the Device
Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the
Administration Device Management command.
96 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

2. Make sure that the media is in a drive or library slot. In the following example, the
media is a tape inserted into a simple drive:

The media is displayed as FOREIGN if it is unknown to the NetVault Database of


your installation.
3. Select the drive or library slot containing the media, right-click and choose Scan
from the pop-up menu:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 97

The media will be scanned and details of the backups contained on it will be
added to the current NetVault Database. The word FOREIGN should now be
removed and the drive light should return to green.

The media is now available for use in a backup or restore.

Working with Cleaning Drives/Slots


You can designate cleaning drives and slots in NetVault, set up an automatic cleaning cycle
and determine how many times it can be used for cleaning. Operators can also manually
trigger cleaning and view information about these activities in the Logs.
In this section you will learn how to configure a cleaning drive/slot and where to go to set up
and view cleaning options.

Configuring Cleaning Drives/Slots


A drive or slot can be designated as a cleaning drive/slot when added or by
modifying an existing one. A cleaning drive/slot cannot be used for any other
purpose. If you dedicate cleaning slots, make sure it is noted to prevent attempts to
use that slot for other operations.

NOTE: When using shared drives, it is recommended that you set up


cleaning abilities on only one client.

To configure a drive/slot, follow these steps:


1. Open the Device Management window by clicking the Device Management
button on the toolbar or by choosing the Administration Device Management
command.
2. Right-click the desired library and choose Modify to open the Modify Library
dialog box.
3. Click the Configure tab to display the drives and slots in the library.
98 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

4. Right-click the library, again, and choose Configure to open the Configure
Device dialog box.
5. Click the Cleaning tab, as shown in the following figure:

6. Enter the appropriate information. Generally you would choose one of the
following methods:
n Barcode Prefix(es) of cleaning media: Enter one or more (separated by
commas) barcode prefixes to identify the tapes used for cleaning.
n Cleaning Slots: Enter the identification of the slots you want to use for
cleaning. You can enter one or more (separated by commas).

NOTE: If you want to remove the cleaning ability from a slot, open the
Configure Device dialog box and clear the entry in the Cleaning Slots box.

7. Click OK to save the changes, exit the Configure Device dialog box and return to
the Modify Library dialog box.
8. Click the Save details button to commit the changes.

Checking Status on Cleaning Drives/Slots


To check the status of a cleaning drive, follow these steps:
1. Open the Device Management window.
2. Right-click the desired drive and choose Status to open the Status dialog box.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 99

3. Click the Cleaning tab for information, as shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Status dialog box, Cleaning tab, includes:


n Date Last Cleaned
n Time Since Last Clean
n Times Cleaned
n Data Transferred Since Last Clean
n Time in Use Since Last Clean
n Soft Errors Since Last Clean
4. Click OK to exit the dialog box.
To check the status of a cleaning slot, follow these steps:
1. With the Device Management window open, right-click the desired cleaning slot
and choose Status to open the Status dialog box, shown in the following figure:

Information available in the slot’s Status dialog box, includes:


n Name
n Physical slot position
n Logical slot position
n Locked by
This information is available for all slots.
100 Chapter 4
Device and Library Management

Setting the Life of Cleaning Media


A cleaning slot can be used a specific number of times. You can designate the
number of times, or life, of a piece of cleaning media.
To set the life of cleaning media, follow these steps:
1. Open the Device Management window.
2. Right-click the desired cleaning slot and choose Life to open the Cleaning Media
Properties dialog box, as shown in the following figure:

3. Click the up and down arrows (or enter the number) until the number of Lives
you want appears in the box.
4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the dialog box.

Setting an Automatic Cleaning Interval


Automatic cleaning routines can be easily defined in NetVault.
To set up an automatic cleaning interval, follow these steps:
1. Open the Device Management window.
2. Right-click the cleaning drive and choose Clean Properties to open the
Cleaning Interval dialog box, shown in the following figure:

In the Cleaning Interval dialog box you can set one or more options, as
described below:
n Days: The number of days between cleanings.
n Data Transferred (Gb): The amount of data transferred in gigabytes.
n Hours of Use: The number of hours the media has been in use.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 101

n Soft Read/Write Errors (x100): The number (in hundreds) of soft read/write
errors that have occurred.
Cleaning occurs when any one of the set options is encountered. For instance,
if you set the number of Days to 3, cleaning happens every third day. If you
want to clean media after a specific number of hours in use, set the Hours of
Use to that number. If all the options are set, cleaning occurs when that criteria
is met.
3. Click OK to commit the specified options and exit the dialog box.

Manually Cleaning Media


An operator can request media cleaning manually.
To submit a request to clean media, follow these steps:
1. Open the Device Management window.
2. Right-click the desired drive and choose Clean.
3. If there is nothing to keep the cleaning from occurring, a Clean Drive dialog
appears confirming the request, as shown in the following figure:

4. Click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the Device Management window.
CHAPTER 5

Client Management
Client Management - 105
The Client Management Window - 105
n Using the Available NetVault Machines List Box - 106
n Using the Clients List Box - 107
n Using Find NetVault Machine - 108
Adding a NetVault Client - 111
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 105

Client Management
All NetVault clients for the Server Selection are controlled by a NetVault server using the
NetVault Client Management window, shown in the following figure:

The NetVault Client Management window is used to monitor, control, and add the NetVault
clients under the control of a NetVault server, as chosen from the Server Selection list.
The list of machines that have NetVault loaded are automatically detected on the network
and displayed under Available NetVault Machines. Any machine on the network, including
other NetVault Servers, can be added as a client to the selected server.

The Client Management Window


The NetVault Client Management window contains the following options:
n Server Selection: Displays the selected NetVault server and contains a list of servers
that were added to the domain.
n Available NetVault Machines: Displays a list of all currently known NetVault machines
on the network, along with their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable).
Available machines may be added as NetVault clients to the selected NetVault server.
n Clients: Lists all current NetVault clients of the selected NetVault server in alphabetical
order with the most currently added client at the top of the list.
n Find NetVault Machine: Allows a search to be made for a NetVault machine not
currently listed in the Available NetVault Machines area. This function is used to find
106 Chapter 5
Client Management

machines located on another network connected by a router, bridge or gateway to the


local network.
n File Menu: Provides access to the Close command used to close the window.
n Help Menu: Accesses help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page.
Using the Available NetVault Machines List Box
The Available NetVault Machines list box displays a list of all currently known
NetVault machines on the network, along with their current status (blue for available,
red for unavailable). Available machines may be added as NetVault clients to the
selected NetVault server.

Icons
The Available NetVault Machines list box indicates the status of NetVault machines
using the following icons:
Icon Indicates:
(blue) Available NetVault machine with NetVault password protec-
tion. This machine may be added as a NetVault client.

(blue) Available NetVault machine without NetVault password pro-


tection. You may add this client without providing a password.

(red) Unavailable NetVault machine. This is usually a machine


with NetVault installed, but is currently powered-off, or booted
with a different operating system than used for the NetVault
installation.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 107

Pop-up Menu Commands


Choose this
To do this:
Command:
Add As Client Add the machine as a client to the selected NetVault server.
Remove Remove the machine from the NetVault server.
Show Details Open a dialog box which displays information about the
selected NetVault machine.

Using the Clients List Box


The Clients list box displays an alphabetically ordered list of all current NetVault
clients for the selected NetVault server, along with their current status (blue for
available, red for unavailable).

Icons
The Clients list box displays the status of NetVault clients using the following icons:
Icon Indicates:
(blue) Available NetVault Client with NetVault password protection.
This is normally a temporary state while the client is being
added; once the client has been successfully added, the key is
removed. It can also occur if the NetVault Password has been
changed for the client since it was added.
(blue) Available NetVault Client which has been successfully
added. The blue icon does not necessarily mean that the
NetVault server has good access to this client; if you are in
doubt as to how efficient the access is, right-click the client,
then choose Check Access.
108 Chapter 5
Client Management

Icon Indicates:
Unavailable NetVault Client. This is often a machine with
NetVault installed that is currently switched off, or booted
under a different operating system from the one containing the
NetVault installation.

Pop-up Menu Commands


Choose this
To do this:
Command:
Properties Open the Client Properties dialog box which displays Sys-
tem, Plugins and Installed Software information.
Remove Remove the machine from the selected NetVault server.
Check Access Check how good the access is between the selected NetVault
server and the selected client.
Install Licence Install a New Licence Key for the selected client. Also choose
Key this command to install a new licence key for the NetVault
server in the Server Selection box, which is usually the first
client in the Clients list box.
Install Software Install new NetVault software components.
Remove Remove any NetVault software components previously
Software installed using the Install Software command.
NOTE: Some installed components (e.g. patches or updates)
are deliberately flagged so that they cannot be removed using
this command.

Using Find NetVault Machine


You can search for a NetVault machine not currently listed in the Available NetVault
Machines list box using Find NetVault Machine. Normally, all NetVault machines
on the local network are listed. With Find NetVault Machine, you can find a NetVault
machine on a different network (connected via a router, bridge, or gateway) and add
it to the list.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 109

The following figure shows two examples of the types of searches you can do:

Searching for a Client by Machine Name


1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. nvserver).
2. Click the Find button.
The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search is
successful, the NetVault Machine (nvserver) is added to the Available
NetVault Machines list box:

See also Reasons for Search Failures (page 110).


Searching for a Client by IP Address
1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. 192.9.201.238).
2. Click the Find button.
110 Chapter 5
Client Management

The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search is


successful, the NetVault Machine (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVault
Machines list box:

See also Reasons for Search Failures (page 110).

Reasons for Search Failures


If the search fails, a dialog box opens and displays the reason for the failure. Some
of the possible reasons are:
n The Machine Name that you entered cannot be found in the DNS lookup table
or your machine's host table, or your machine is not able to contact the DNS
server.

n The machine was found, but probably does not have NetVault installed or
running. In this case, one of the following dialog boxes appears:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 111

n The machine you searched for is already in the list!

Adding a NetVault Client


NetVault is a Network backup solution, using a client/server architecture. A NetVault server
controls the backup and restore activity for itself and a number of other machines, called
NetVault clients, in a NetVault domain.
A machine being added as a NetVault client requires:
n NetVault client software installed. A NetVault client does not normally have a GUI
(Graphical User Interface), although using the Custom install option, one can be added
if necessary. A NetVault server can also be added as a NetVault client in another
NetVault domain.
n A NetVault Security Password. This is normally added during installation, but can be
added later using the NetVault Configurator run on the local machine. You will need to
know the password to add the client.
112 Chapter 5
Client Management

Domain A
Tape
Library Network
Client
SCSI
Client Client Client Client
NetVault 6
Server
Unix / NT

Domain
Admin
Domain B
Client Client Client Client Client Client
NetVault 6
Server
Unix / NT

Tape
Library
Client Client

Adding a NetVault Client


1. Open the NetVault Clients window. Make sure the correct NetVault machine is
displayed in the Server Selection box.
2. Select the client you want to add from the Available NetVault Machines list.
3. Right-click the client, then choose Add As Client.

SECURITY NOTE: Unless the Security has been disabled in the NetVault
Configurator, Security tab, you must enter the NetVault Password to be
granted access to this client.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 113

The Password Required dialog box opens:

4. Type the NetVault Password for this machine in the Enter Password box.
5. Click the OK button.
If the password entered was correct and there were no network communication
problems, the System Access Passed dialog box opens:

NOTE: If the wrong password is entered when adding the client, right-click
the client in the Clients list and choose Check Access; you can then enter
the correct password. The “System Access Passed” message will appear
when the security password has been entered correctly.
CHAPTER 6

Domain Management
Domain Management - 117
The NetVault Domain Management Window - 117
n Using the Available NetVault Servers List Box - 118
n Using the Controlled Servers List Box - 119
n Using Find NetVault Machine - 121
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 117

Domain Management
NetVault is a network solution in which one machine is configured as a NetVault server with
NetVault clients assigned to it. A single NetVault server and its NetVault clients make up a
NetVault Domain.
You can choose to administer the server from the machine running the server software, or
from a remote workstation. Many servers can be administered from a central location, thus
creating a Domain Management facility. A Domain Manager requires the installation of a
NetVault GUI (Graphical User Interface).
In the NetVault Domain Management window you can designate an Available NetVault
Server as a Controlled Server (with the proper security permissions). This sets the servers
available in the Server Selection list of the general NetVault control windows. Any single
Controlled Server can be set as the automatic default for the Server Selection list in all other
windows.

The NetVault Domain Management Window


The NetVault Domain Management window is similar in layout to the NetVault Client
Management window.
To open the Domain Management window, shown in the following figure, choose the
Administration Domain Management command:

Options available in the window include:


n Available NetVault Servers: The list of all currently known NetVault servers on the
network (local area, wide area or the Internet), along with their current status (blue for
118 Chapter 6
Domain Management

available, red for unavailable). With the correct security password, servers may be added
to the Controlled Servers area.
n Controlled Servers: Displays a list of all NetVault servers which may be controlled from
the selected server, along with their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable.
With the correct security password, servers may be added from the Available NetVault
Servers list.
n Find NetVault Machine: Allows a search to be made for a NetVault server machine not
currently listed in Available NetVault Servers. With this function you can find machines
located on another network connected by a router, bridge or gateway to the local
network.
n File Menu: Provides access to the Close command used to close the window.
n Help Menu: Accesses help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page.
Using the Available NetVault Servers List Box
The Available NetVault Servers list box displays a list of all currently known
NetVault servers on the network (local area, wide area or the Internet), along with
their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable). With the correct security
password, servers may be added to the Controlled Servers area.

Icons
The Available NetVault Servers list box indicates the status of NetVault servers
using the following icons:
Icon Indicates:
(blue) Available NetVault server. This machine may be added to
the Controlled Servers list.

(red) Unavailable NetVault Server. This is often a machine which


has NetVault installed on it which is currently switched off, or
booted under a different operating system from the NetVault
installation.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 119

Pop-up Menu Commands


Choose this
To do this:
Command:
Add As Server Add the selected Available NetVault Server to the Con-
trolled Servers area.
Show Details Open the NetVault Machine Details dialog box which displays
information about the selected Available NetVault Server.

NetVault Machine Details Dialog Box


Right-click an Available NetVault Server and choose Show Details to open the
NetVault Machine Details dialog box, shown in the following figure:

The following information is included:


n The NetVault name of the machine.
n The Type of the machine (NT or UNIX).
n UDP Fragment Size is the maximum size of a UDP packet.
n Server. TRUE if the machine is a server, FALSE if it is a client.
n Networks. A list of all the network addresses associated with the machine.
n Fixed entry. Not used at this time.
n Preferred Address. The network specified as the primary communication for
that machine.
n Contact Address. The network used by NetVault to communicate with the
machine.
n Id. The internal ID number.
n Version. The internal version number.
Using the Controlled Servers List Box
The Controlled Servers list box displays the list of all NetVault Servers which can
be controlled by the selected server, along with their current status (blue for
120 Chapter 6
Domain Management

available, red for unavailable). With the correct security password, servers may be
added to the area from the Available NetVault Servers area.

Icons
The Controlled Servers list box displays the status of NetVault servers using the
following icons:
Icon Indicates:
(blue) Available NetVault Server which has been successfully
added. The blue icon does not necessarily mean that the
NetVault GUI has good access to this server; if you are in
doubt as to how efficient the access is, check it by choosing
the Check Access command.
(red) Unavailable NetVault Server. This is often a machine with
NetVault installed that is currently switched off, or booted
under a different operating system from the one containing the
NetVault installation.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 121

Pop-up Menu Commands


Choose this
To do this:
Command:
Properties Open the Server Properties dialog box which displays System,
Plugins, Installed Software and Capabilities information.
Remove Remove the selected server from the Controlled Servers list.
Make Default Make the selected NetVault server the default for the Server
Selection list shown on most NetVault screens.
Check Access Check how good the access is between the current computer
and the selected NetVault server.

Using Find NetVault Machine


You can search for a NetVault machine not currently listed in the Available
NetVault Machines list box using Find NetVault Machine. Normally, all NetVault
machines on the local network are listed. With Find NetVault Machine, you can
find a NetVault machine on a network connected via a router, bridge, or gateway to
the local network and add it to the list.
The following figure shows two examples of the types of searches you can do:

Searching by Machine Name


1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. nvserver).
2. Click the Find button.
122 Chapter 6
Domain Management

The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search is


successful, the NetVault Server (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVault
Servers list box.
Searching by IP Address
1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. 192.9.201.238).
2. Click the Find button.
The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search is
successful, the NetVault Machine (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVault
Machines list box.

Reasons for Search Failures


If the search fails, a dialog box opens and displays the reason for the failure. Some
of the possible reasons are:
n The Machine Name that you entered cannot be found in the DNS servers list or
your machine's host table.

n The machine was found, but probably does not have NetVault installed or
running. In this case, one of the following dialog boxes appears:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 123

n The machine you searched for is already in the list!

n The machine has NetVault installed but is not a NetVault server.


CHAPTER 7

Media Management
Media Management - 127
The Media Management Window - 127
n Using the Media List Box - 128
n Status Information in Details Area - 129
n Using the Backup Saveset Pop-up Menu - 135
n Backup Saveset Information in Details Area - 135
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 127

Media Management
Managing the media you use to store your data is effortless with NetVault’s Media
Management utility. In the Media Management window you have access to all the
information you need about your media.
To open the Media Management window, shown in the following figure, click the Media
Management button on the command toolbars or choose Operations Media management:

The Media Management Window


The NetVault Media Management window allows media to be examined for the selected
server. The window contains a Media selection area and Details tabbed areas to allow
different aspects of either the Media or backup saveset to be examined.
The Media Management window contains the following options:
n Media: This area is used to select either the Media (e.g. tape or virtual tape) or the
backup saveset to be examined or controlled.
n Details: This tabbed area provides status information on either the media or saveset
selected.
n File Menu: Accesses commands to Print Setup, Print and Close the window.
n Help Menu: Accesses the commands used to display help for the Current Topic or the
Help Contents page.
128 Chapter 7
Media Management

Using the Media List Box


The Media list box of the window contains the following options:

Icons
Icon Indicates:
Media Group (with Group Label Name alongside) - This icon is
only shown if a Group Label was defined when the media was first
labelled (an advanced function). All media with this Group Label will
be shown in an indented list directly beneath it.
Tape Media (with Media Label Name alongside) - This icon repre-
sents Tape Media. If the media has been automatically labelled by
NetVault, or manually labelled without a Group Label, the icon is
shown on the left; otherwise it will be indented under the Media
Group icon (as shown at the bottom).
Virtual Tape Media (with Media Label Name alongside) - This icon
represents Virtual Tape Media (actually a disk file). If the media has
been automatically labelled by NetVault, or manually labelled without
a Group Label, the icon is shown on the left; otherwise it will be
indented under the Media Group icon (as shown at the bottom).
Backup Saveset (with Job Title and Saveset Number alongside)
- This icon represents a Saveset for a job written to the media. Note
that a Saveset may span more than one media item, in which case it
will be listed under each.

Pop-up Menu Commands


Choose this
To do this:
Command:
Open Open the media to display any Savesets.
Status Displays a tabbed set of information in the Details area. The
actual tabs displayed can vary, but may include Details, Statis-
tics, History Library and Media Requests.
Remove Remove the media selected from the NetVault Database after
confirmation. Only offline media may be removed. If you
decide to use it again to restore data from it, you will need to
Scan it using the Device Management facilities to re-add the
details to the database.
Re-use Mark the media for re-use. Until the first new backup saveset is
written to the media, the existing data may still be recovered by
re-scanning the media (as above).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 129

Choose this
To do this:
Command:
Properties Displays the Properties of the media which include: Media
Label, Group Label, Offsite Location and Tape Format. Except
for blank media, only the Offsite Location may be changed
here.

Status Information in Details Area


When an item of Media is selected and the pop-up menu opened, as shown in the
following figure, you can choose Status to display information in the Details area.

The actual tabs appearing in the Details section can vary, but can include tabs for
Details, Statistics, History and Library and Media Requests.

Details Tab
The Details tab appears as shown in the following figure:
130 Chapter 7
Media Management

Typical information shown on the Details tab includes:


Name Description
Name The title given to a specific piece of media.
Group Name The name assigned to several pieces of media.
Offsite The location of the media. Used to identify a media’s origin
Location when the media is imported to a new location.
Space Used Graphically indicates how much space on the media has been
used. If you require a quantity in Mbytes, please see Space
Used in the Statistics tab.
Media Type Details the type of media used, tape, disk file, etc.
Barcode If the media has a barcode, it is displayed here.
Retire Media Indicates whether the device media should be discarded after
a specified number of backups or period of time.

Statistics Tab
The Statistics tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Statistics tab includes:


Name Description
Space Left Indicates how much space is left on the media. This informa-
tion is important when considering where backed up data
should be placed.
Data Stored Shows how much data has been stored on the media.
Number of Details the number of media segments contained on an item of
Segments media.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 131

Name Description
Date Last Shows when the media was last written on. The first four digits
Written signify the year, the next two the month and the last two the
day. The time is displayed in a 24 hour clock format.
Date Last Read Shows when the media was last read. The date protocol is the
same as Date Last Written.

History Tab
The History Tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the History tab includes:


Name Description
Times Reused Indicates how many times the media has been used.
Read Errors Lists the number of Read Errors that have occurred. Normally
you would see no errors. If there are errors it could indicate
possible media or drive failures, and the cause should be
investigated immediately.
Write Errors Lists the number of errors that have occurred writing data to
the media. If there are errors it could indicate possible media
or drive failures, and the cause should be investigated immedi-
ately.
Total Data Indicates the amount of data written to the Media. This is a
Written running total which spans any Reuse of the tape.
Total Data Indicates the amount of data read from the Media. This is a
Read running total which spans any Reuse of the tape.
132 Chapter 7
Media Management

Library Info Tab


The Library Info tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Library Info tab includes:


Name Description
Name The name allocated to the Library in the NetVault Device Man-
agement window.
In Shows the Drive where the media is located.
Home Shows the Slot where media is located.

Media Request Tab


The Media Request tab is an administrative tool displaying information on NetVault
media requests while a job is active. This information is useful when determining why
a backup job using the media is paused and displays 'Waiting for Media' in the Job
Status window.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 133

The Media Request Tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Media Request tab includes:


Name Description
Request The identifying number for the media request.
Job The related Job Number.
Request type Indicates whether the media request is for a backup or a
restore.
NOTE: The other parameters listed here are for a backup
media request.
Status The current status of the job.
Requesting The NetVault machine requesting the media.
Machine
Drives Indicates which drive(s) the media request uses. In this exam-
ple, the Backup was targeted to a single drive, the virtual
library G:, DRIVE 1, so only this drive is listed.
134 Chapter 7
Media Management

Name Description
Media Specifies which media the request uses. In this example, the
Backup did not use target specific media, so 'Any' is shown. If
the Backup uses target specific media, e.g. by Media Label
(MID) or Media Group, then the appropriate identifier is shown.
Required Indicates the setting of the Specify minimum space required on
amount of media before backup option in the Backup - Target, General
media Option tab. In this example, only media with at least 18 Mbytes
free may be used.
Force first Indicates the setting of the Force first backup option. ensure
backup this backup is the first on the media option in the Backup - Tar-
get, General Option tab.
Label Indicates the setting of the Automatically label new or reused
automatically media option in the Backup - Target, Media Option tab.
Mark media Indicates the setting of the Protect media from further writes
read-only on after backup option in the Backup - Target, General Option
completion tab.
Use media Normally this parameter will be set to default. This means that
format the default media format will be used (MTF for NT, or CPIO for
UNIX). When a backup needs to span more than one item of
media, if the first item of media uses MTF, then all other others
must also use MTF (similar for CPIO, i.e. a backup job cannot
used mixed media formats).
Return media This parameter applies only to media in Libraries. When the
to slot on Library Return inactive media to slot delay parameter is set in
completion the Add Library - Configure, Library Icon pop-up menu, Config-
ure command, the specified parameter is listed here.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 135

Using the Backup Saveset Pop-up Menu


When a backup saveset is selected, and the pop-up menu opened, the Status
command is available:
Status
command

Backup Saveset Information in Details Area


When the Status command is chosen for a selected backup saveset, information
about the Saveset is displayed in the Details tabbed area. If a backup spans more
that one item of media, the same Saveset number will be listed under all media
used.
The tabs that appear in the Details area can vary, but will always include a single
Backup tab and at least one Segment tab. The Backup tab provides backup
overview information and the Segment 1 tab contains data about the first backup
segment. The Segment 2 tab appears only when the media is written using MTF
(Microsoft Tape Format); the Segment 2 tab is a fixed 32 Kilobyte closing data
section for MTF compliance.
136 Chapter 7
Media Management

The Backup Tab


The Backup tab appears is shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Backup tab includes:


Name Description
Job This is the job number the request relates to.
Title The name or title given to the backup job.
Server The NetVault Server in control of the relevant backup.
Client The NetVault Client for whom data had been backed up.
Plugin Details the type of plugin used to carry out the backup.
Backup Set The Backup Set allows a particular backup to be saved and re-
loaded for use with more than one Backup Submission. This
area will tell you the name of the Backup Set used, if any (e.g.
Rich,e:\_test).
Date The date and time when the backup occurred.
Incremental Indicates if the backup is an Incremental type backup or a Full
backup.
Archive Indicates if the backup has been marked as an archive
Generations If the backup is to be discarded after a specified number of full
backups, the Generations detail shows the remaining number
of backups available. For instance, if n (the number of full
backups) has a value of 5, the generations counter is reduced
by 1 each time there is a full backup. Once the generations
reach 0, the backup is retired. Backup Life is set in the
NetVault Backup, Advanced Options tabbed area. For more
information about using Advanced Options, see Using the
Advanced Options Tab (page 273).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 137

Name Description
Retire The date the backup will be retired, or NEVER.

Segment 1 Tab
The Segment 1 tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Segment 1 tab includes:


Name Description
Length The length of the segment in Mbytes.
Offset The number of bytes the start of this segment is offset from the
start of the backup. The first segment is always offset 0 bytes.
Position Position of the segment on the NetVault media.
Block Size The block size being used by the device. Backups are saved to
the media in whole multiples of this block size, with the last
block being padded out when required.
Total Time Total time taken for the backup. In this example, using a virtual
(disk) tape, the time taken was so short that it is shown as 0
secs.
Transfer Time The amount of time taken for the backup job to transfer to the
segment. In this example, using a virtual (disk) tape, the time
taken was so short that it is shown as 0 secs.
Retire The date the backup will be retired, or NEVER.
Length The length of the segment in Mbytes.
138 Chapter 7
Media Management

Segment 2 Tab
The Segment 2 tab, with information on a fixed 32 Kilobyte tape index section for
MTF compliance, appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Segment 2 tab includes:


Name Description
Length The length of the segment in Mbytes.
Offset The number of bytes the start of this segment is offset from the
start of the backup. In this example, as the first segment was
1.81 Mbytes long, the start of the second segment is offset by
that amount.
Position Position of the segment on the NetVault media.
Block Size The block size being used by the device. Backups are saved to
the media in whole multiples of this block size (the last block
being padded out when required).
Total Time Total time taken for the backup. In this example, using a virtual
(disk) tape, the time taken was so short that it is shown as 0
secs.
Transfer Time The amount of time taken for the backup job to transfer to the
segment. In this example, using a virtual (disk) tape, the time
taken was so short that it is shown as 0 secs.
Retire Is a date the backup will be retired, or NEVER.
Length The length of the segment in Mbytes.
CHAPTER 8

NetVault Server Status


The NetVault Server Status Window - 141
n Using the Device Status Area - 142
n Using the Client Status Area - 143
n Using the Client Status Area - 143
n Using Operator Status Area - 146
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 141

The NetVault Server Status Window


The NetVault Server Status window displays information on the status of the selected
server. The window contains individual, re-sizable areas for the display of each type of
information. Each of the areas is explained in the sections of this chapter.
The NetVault Server Status window appears as shown in the following figure:

The window contains the following information:


n Device Status: Shows the availability and state of each device for the NetVault server.
n Client Status: Shows the state of each NetVault client of the NetVault server.
n Job Status: Shows the state of each job controlled by the NetVault server.
n Operator Messages: Shows all Operator Messages for jobs controlled by the NetVault
server.
n File Menu: Accesses the commands used to Print Setup, Print and Close the
window.
142 Chapter 8
NetVault Server Status

n Operations Menu: Contains commands to open other windows:


n Backup
n Restore
n Media Management
n Job Management
n Logs
n Administration Menu: Contains commands to open other windows:
n Client Management
n Domain Management
n Device Management
n Policy Management
n Help Menu: Accesses the commands used to display help for the Current Topic or the
Help Contents page.

Using the Device Status Area


The Device Status area shows the availability and state of each device for the
selected NetVault server.

Drive Lights
Drives are shown with one of three colored lights:
Drive Light Indicates:
A drive with a Green light, indicates that the drive is available
and not in use.
Green

A drive with a Yellow light, indicates that the drive is currently


in use.
Yellow
A drive with a Red light, indicates that the drive is not available
(and there could be a problem with it).
Red
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 143

Using the Client Status Area


The Client Status area shows the state of each NetVault Client of the selected
NetVault server.

Icons
The Client Status area shows NetVault clients using the following icons:
Icon Indicates:
(blue) Available NetVault Client with NetVault password protection.
This is normally a temporary state while the client is being
added; once the client has been successfully added, the key is
removed. It can also occur if the NetVault Password has been
changed for the client since it was added.
(blue) Available NetVault Client which has been successfully
added. The blue icon does not necessarily mean that the
NetVault Server has good access to this client; if you are in
doubt as to how efficient the access is, right-click the client
then choose Check Access.
(red) Unavailable NetVault Client. This is often a machine with
NetVault installed that is currently switched off, or booted
under a different operating system from the one containing the
NetVault installation.

Using the Job Status Area


The Job Status area shows the state of each job for the selected NetVault server.
Jobs listed are all those submitted since the NetVault services were last started.
144 Chapter 8
NetVault Server Status

Job Status Identification


Jobs are displayed in different colors, depending on their status:
Icon Indicates:
Cyan Blue Jobs Scheduled, but not yet running.
Yellow Jobs currently Running.
White Jobs Completed (not necessarily successfully).
Dark Blue Selected Job (right mouse button for options).

Pop-up Menu Commands


A pop-up menu opens when you right-click a selected item. The commands available
in the menu vary, depending on the current job status. The Status tab contains the
same information as displayed in the Status area of the NetVault Server Status
window; the descriptions below relate to both areas.
Scheduled Job Area Pop-up Menus
The Scheduled Job area (default color Cyan Blue) pop-up menu commands are:
Choose this
To do this:
command:
Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window.
This allows all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to
a new job. You may also double-click the log entry to perform
the same function.
Delete Schedule Delete the job schedule. Note that the job itself is not deleted
and continues to appear in the Jobs area. If necessary you
can load the job into the appropriate backup or restore window
and re-submit it later.
Hold Put a temporary hold on the scheduled job. After selection,
this menu item changes to Resume which may be selected to
re-activate the job as scheduled.
Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to
the job queue to run it as soon as possible.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 145

Running Job Area Pop-up Menus

The Running Job area (default color Yellow) pop-up menu commands are:
Choose this
To do this:
command:
Monitor Job Open the Job Monitor dialog box for the selected job. This pro-
vides both Job Information and Data Transfer information as
the job progresses. You may also double-click the log entry to
perform the same function.
View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-
play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log
entries).
Abort Job Abort a running job. After selection, an Aborting Job dialog
box opens. The job Status is shown as Aborted by user.
Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window
to allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a
new job.

Completed Job Area Pop-up Menus


The Completed job area (default color White) pop-up menu commands are:
Choose this
To do this:
command:
View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-
play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log
entries).
Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window
to allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a
new job.
Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to
the job queue to run it as soon as possible.
146 Chapter 8
NetVault Server Status

Using Operator Status Area


The Operator Messages area shows all Operator Messages for the selected
NetVault server.

Most of these messages are various types of Warnings that require some operator
intervention. For example, the above message indicates No suitable media found
for Job 15. This may require the tape(s) to be changed in one or more devices
controlled by the selected NetVault server.
CHAPTER 9

Disaster Recovery
Disaster Recovery - 149
Backing Up the NetVault Database - 149
NetVault Database Recovery - 149
n Restoring Basic Operating System - 149
n Restoring NetVault Operation - 150
n Handling Backups Since Last NV Database Backup - 150
Restoring the NetVault Database - 150
Importing Media Unknown to NV Database - 151
Using the Data Copy Plugin - 151
n Target Audience - 152
n Installing the Data Copy Plugin - 152
n Backing Up Data with the Data Copy Plugin - 152
n Copying Data - 152
n Copying a Backup - 155
n Copying a Backup Set - 156
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 149

Disaster Recovery
Backing up and storing your data is crucial to recovering from a catastrophic event that
destroys your data. There are two important components to easily restoring information:
n The NetVault Database
n Copying backed up data to an offsite location using the Data Copy plugin included in
your NetVault installation.
This chapter discusses how to use each of these features to ensure that you can access and
recover data.

The NetVault Database


The NetVault database contains all details for the installation of the NetVault server. This
includes information on configuration, keys, log, media and schedules.
Because this information is important to keeping NetVault operations available, a backup of
the NetVault database should be scheduled to run daily, preferably as the last job in the
daily backup process. With a good NetVault database backup you can quickly restore
NetVault to full operation, if necessary.

Backing Up the NetVault Database


The NetVault database can be backed up at any time as long as no other jobs are running.

NOTE: It is strongly recommended that a NetVault database backup be


scheduled to run on a daily basis and as the last job run in the daily backup
schedule.

To perform the backup, follow the steps found in Chapter 10, Backing Up Data (page 157). It
is recommended that you use Target Media to direct the output of the backup to a specific
item of media (MID or Media Identifier); if recovery becomes necessary the media can be
easily and quickly found and restored.

NetVault Database Recovery


In the case of a critical event, typically a hard disk crash, the NetVault server and possibly
the computer it is installed on, may become unusable.
Depending on the configuration of the computer, you may need to perform some, or all, of
the following steps:

Restoring Basic Operating System


1. Replace the defective hard drive.
150 Chapter 9
Disaster Recovery

2. Re-install the operating system if it was stored on the defective drive.

Restoring NetVault Operation


1. Re-install NetVault on the new hard disk, using the same path as the original
installation.
Do not add any NetVault clients, unless your main NetVault device is not
connected to your NetVault server. If it is connected, then add the machine it is
connected to as a NetVault client.
2. Remove all media from your normal NetVault device, except the item of media
containing the most recent NetVault database backup.
3. Add the NetVault device as normal. See Adding NetVault Devices (page 77) for
more information.
4. Restore the database backup using the steps in Chapter 11, Restoring Data
(page 197).
The installation should now be restored to the state it was in at the time the last
database backup was performed. Restore any other data that was lost using the
normal NetVault backup media.

Handling Backups Since Last NV Database Backup


If any backups were performed since the last NetVault database backup, the media
containing the backups should be scanned to add the backups to the NetVault
database and enable these items of media to be used for further backups.
To scan for backups, select the slot or drive containing the media from the Devices
tab of the Device Management or Restore windows, and choose Scan from the pop-
up menu.

Restoring the NetVault Database


Restoring the NetVault database is normally performed as part of disaster recovery, and is
usually a full database restore. It is possible to restore part of the NetVault database backup,
but it is recommended that you do so only under the guidance of NetVault Technical Support
(page 6).
To restore the NetVault database, in its entirety, follow these steps:
1. Open the Device Management window by clicking the Device Management
button on the command toolbars, or by choosing the Administration Device
Management command.
2. Make sure that the media containing the most recent NetVault database backup
is in a drive or library slot. The media is display as FOREIGN, since it is currently
unknown to the new NetVault database installation.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 151

3. Select the drive or library slot, right-click and choose Scan from the pop-up
menu.
The media is scanned and details of the backups contained on it are added to
the current NetVault database. The word FOREIGN is removed and the drive
light should turn green.
4. Close the Device Management window.
5. Open the Restore window by clicking the Restore button on the command
toolbars, or by choosing Operations Restore.
6. Select the client (or NetVault server) and choose Open from the pop-up menu,
or double-click the client to display the databases within it.
7. Open the NetVault Databases item to display the backup savesets available for
restore.
8. Select the most recent backup saveset, right-click and choose Open from the
pop-up menu, or double-click the backup saveset.
9. Select all items in the backup saveset by clicking the square next to each item.
10. Enter the name of the job in the Job Title box.
11. Submit the job by clicking the Submit button.
The NetVault database restore will be run. Do not monitor the job while it is running, since
this may interfere with the process. It is best to submit the job and then close all NetVault
windows until the restore is complete.

Importing Media Unknown to NV Database


To import NetVault media from a different NetVault server (or a previous installation of the
current NetVault server), use the Scan utility found in the pop-up menu that appears when
you select the media in the drive or library slot in the Device Management screen.
For more information on using the Scan utility, see Scanning Drives and Media (page 94).

Using the Data Copy Plugin


The Data Copy plugin allows you to make copies of a previously completed backup and
schedule copies to be made on a regular basis. Copies can be made of any one of the
existing backup savesets or from a backup set.
152 Chapter 9
Disaster Recovery

Target Audience
No special skills are required for routine backup operations or for using the Data
Copy plugin.

Installing the Data Copy Plugin


The Data Copy plugin is included and automatically installed when you install
NetVault and no further installation activity is required. The Data Copy plugin is only
available for a NetVault server.

Backing Up Data with the Data Copy Plugin


Backups are performed using the standard steps for any backup job. For complete
information on backing up data, see your NetVault Administrator’s Guide.
Even though the Data Copy plugin is installed, it is not used during normal backup
functions.

Copying Data
The Data Copy plugin copies previously made backups. You can make copies in two
ways:
n From the Backups folder. You can select a single backup saveset from the
Backups folder and create a copy.
n From the Backup Sets folder: When you select a Backup Set to copy,
NetVault always copies the most current data, unless the “use last full backup”
option is selected.
To perform a copy of a backup using the Data Copy plugin, follow these steps:
1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the
command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. The
NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.
2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or
double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins. You must select the
server with the Data Copy plugin installed. Servers are always listed at the top of
the data tree
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 153

NOTE: It is important to note that two devices, or pieces of media, are required
to copy data.

3. Double-click the Data Copy plugin to open and display the folders:
154 Chapter 9
Disaster Recovery

4. Double-click the Backups or Backup Sets folder to display the list of clients on
the server with backups or backup sets available to be copied.
5. Double-click the desired client and continue to double-click to open each item
until you reach the backups available to be copied. For instructions on copying a
backup saveset, see Copying a Backup (page 155). Information on copying a
backup set can be found in Copying a Backup Set (page 156).
6. Click the Backup Options tab to display the backup options, shown in the
following figure:

7. Select the desired Data Copy Options as follows:


n COPY TYPE - Copy a full backup to produce a new independent copy of
the data: Copies the selected backup; producing a new image with its own
index.
n COPY TYPE - Duplicate a backup (duplicated incrementals will need their
original full backup for restore): Duplicates the data. Both copies share the
existing index. A new index is not created.
n COPY TYPE - Use Saveset name from original backup: Loads and uses the
Selection saveset from the original backup for the current data copy. This
option is available for selection when the Copy a full backup to produce a
new independent copy of the data option is selected. When the Duplicate a
backup (duplicated incrementals will need their original full backup for
restore) option is selected, this option is automatically activated.
n COPY TYPE - Automatically get a set’s last full backup: When selected,
this option directs NetVault to retrieve the last full backup performed with the
selected set.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 155

n COPY TYPE - Use a set’s most recent job regardless of type: Repeats the
last backup performed on the set, whether it was an incremental or full
backup.
n Migrate (Discard original backup): Makes a copy of the original backup then
removes the original. This option is useful for disk staging and tape cleanups.
n BACKUP LIFE - Use originals life: Applies the same backup life to the copy
as was used for the original backup.
n BACKUP LIFE - Use ‘Backup Life’ on “Advanced Options’ tab: Resets the
backup life for the copy to the selection made in the Advanced Options tab.
8. Enter a title for the job in the Job Title box.
9. Submit the backup job by clicking the Submit button on the command toolbar.
See your NetVault Administrator’s Guide for information on viewing the job
status, progress and log.

Copying a Backup
The Backup folder lists the clients and all backups done on each, similar to the
example shown in the following figure:

1. Select the desired backup saveset.


2. Select any other desired options and submit the job.
156 Chapter 9
Disaster Recovery

Copying a Backup Set


The Backup Sets folder lists the Backup Sets used to create backups, similar to that
shown in the following figure:

1. Select the desired backup set.


2. Select any other options and submit the job
NetVault locates the most current backup with this data in it and performs the copy.
CHAPTER 10

Backing Up Data
Backing up Your Data - 159
The NetVault Backup Window - 159
n Backup Window Buttons - 160
n Window Tabs - 160
n Menu Commands - 161
n Using the Selections Tab - 162
n Using the Backup Options Tab - 168
n Using the Schedule Tab - 173
n Using the Target Tab - 174
n Advanced Options - 178
n Savesets - 178
Incremental Backup Procedure - 179
n Creating a Typical Weekly Full and Incremental Schedule - 179
Restoring Incremental Backups - 180
Doing a Simple Backup - 180
Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin - 182
n Installing the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin - 182
n How the Plugin Works - 182
n Consolidating Backups - 182
Using the Raw Device Plugin - 186
n Installing the Raw Device Plugin - 186
n Using the Raw Device Plugin for NT - 187
n Using the Raw Device Plugin for UNIX - 192
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 159

Backing up Your Data


A NetVault backup is the name given to the transfer of data from the NetVault client to the
backup device. The device's media stores the data, where it can be recovered by NetVault if
needed. Note that the NetVault server itself also acts as a NetVault client so that it may
backup its own data.
Most backups are very easy to create and submit. The NetVault Backup window provides
access to a number of control functions, some of which are required only under special
circumstances.
Data can be backed up in a variety of ways, including:
n A NetVault server can back up its data to itself as a NetVault client.
n Data can be backed up to devices across a network.
n Backed up data can be placed on more than one type of media.
n Backups can be scheduled to run automatically.
n Data can be backed up completely or incrementally.
In this chapter you will learn how to perform a simple backup and what the advanced options
are for more complex backup jobs.

The NetVault Backup Window


The NetVault Backup window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting backup
jobs for any NetVault client controlled by the selected NetVault server.
The NetVault Backup window appears as shown in the following figure:
160 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

The NetVault Backup window contains the following options:

Backup Window Buttons


There are four buttons at the top of the NetVault Backup window that perform the
following functions:
Click this
To do this:
button
Clear current NetVault backup selections and control settings
and create a new backup job. Remember that you can create
NEW and save a backup job without submitting it.
Load an existing backup job, so this it may be modified, cop-
ied, re-saved under the current or a new job number and sub-
mitted. It is often easier to re-load a backup job by first finding
LOAD it in the list in the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab list, selecting
it and then choosing Edit/Modify.
Save the current backup Job. Remember that you can access
the saved job via the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab (see
SAVE Using the Job Status Area (page 143)), as well as clicking the
Load button to reload it. It is very important for good backup
management that you save a backup job with a meaningful
name as a Job Title.
Add the job to the scheduled jobs list (except for triggered jobs
which are just saved). Scheduled jobs are listed on the Status
SUBMIT tab of the NetVault Jobs window (see Using The Status Tab
(page 242)) and the Job Status area of the NetVault Server
Status window (see Using The Status Tab (page 242)).

Window Tabs
The following tabs appear on the window:
n Selections: Used to select the data to be backed up, using the appropriate
NetVault plugin. Some NetVault plugins are provided as part of the standard
installation, while Application Plugin Modules (APM) are only available if
installed separately. For more information on installing plugins, see Installing
NetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).
n Backup Options: The Backup Options tab allows extra information for the job
to be specified, depending on the NetVault plugin or APM in use in the
Selections area. For example, a File System backup (e.g. NT or UNIX File
System plugin) allows you to specify the type of backup (e.g. Full, Incremental,
etc.). For NetVault APM’s, the settings available may include login details (e.g.
Connect As, Password) to allow access to the data selected for backup. For a
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 161

description of the more standard options, see Using the Backup Options Tab
(page 168).
n Schedule: Used to specify when the job will run. Jobs can be scheduled to
run immediately, at a later date/time or run when triggered by a command line
or script command. You can also set a job to run once or to repeat. For full
information on both backup and restore job scheduling, see Scheduling
Backup & Restore Jobs (page 225).
n Target: Used to specify what the selected data is backed up on (or to). You
may Target a particular Device or Media, and set parameters for General
Options. See Using the Target Tab (page 174) for more information.
n Advanced Options: The options in the Advanced Options tab are only used
for advanced functions, including setting Backup Life, Compression,
Verification, Duplication, Pre and Post Scripts. The use of these functions is
detailed in Using Advanced Features (page 271).

Menu Commands
The Menu Bar in the NetVault Backup window provides access to the commands
described in the following table:
Choose this
Menu To do this:
command:
File New Creates a new backup job.
Load Opens the Load Backup Job dialog
box where you can select a saved job
that you want to run again.
Save Saves the current backup job and
assigns a job name.
Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box where
you can select the desired printer and
specify its properties.
Close Close the Backup window.
View Selections Open the Selections tab.
Backup Options Open the Backup Options tab.
Schedule Open the Schedule tab.
Target Open the Target tab.
Advanced Options Open the Advanced Options tab.
Accept Submit Backup Starts the backup job.
162 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

Choose this
Menu To do this:
command:
Help Current Topic Display a description of and help for
the current focus item.
Help Contents Display the Help Contents.

Using the Selections Tab


The Selections tab is used to select the data to be backed up, using the appropriate
NetVault plugin or APM. Some NetVault plugins are provided as part of the standard
installation, while APM’s are only available if installed separately. For more
information on NetVault plugins see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).
The Selections tab of the NetVault Backup window appears as shown in the
following figure:

Selecting Data to be Backed Up


The exact method used to select the data to be backed up depends on the type of
NetVault plugin being used. Refer to Using Help (page 5) to get more information on
the online Plugin Help installed with the plugin. Some standard methods are detailed
here.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 163

Windows File System Plugin Data Selection Example


The following example demonstrates how to select data for backup using a
Windows NT File System Plugin.
1. Select the Client, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the client).
2. Select the Plugin, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the plugin).

The About menu command displays information on the NetVault Plugin


Version, and if applicable, the Licence details. The File Systems Help menu
item opens the Help screen for the plugin loaded.
The plugin opens to display all drives for the selected client.
The following is an example of typical drives which may be displayed when
using the NT File Systems plugin. Note you cannot select the Shared Drives for
backup with this plugin.
164 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

3. Select the desired Drive, right-click and choose Open or double-click the drive,
as shown in the following figure:

When you want the drive to be included in the backup, click the square to its left
to place a green check mark there. Information about the drive can be displayed
by right-clicking and choosing the View Details command from the pop-up
menu.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 165

4. Select the Directory, right-click and choose Open or double-click it.


When you want the directory to be included in the backup, click the square to its
left to place a green check mark there. Information about the directory can be
displayed by choosing the View Details command.
166 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

The restore tree for this example saveset has been expanded. Continue to open
each level of the tree until the files you want to backup are displayed. You can
select a file to be restored by clicking the square to its left, so that the green
check mark is displayed. You can also View Details of the file.

5. Select the data to be backed up by clicking the square to the left of each desired
item. In the following example, the complete drive is selected for backup:

If you do not want to include a file (or directory tree) in the selection, click the
square to its left again. The green check mark changes to a red X, indicating that
it is excluded from the backup:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 167

Once the data has been selected, you should do the following:
1. Set the required Backup Options. See Using the Backup Options Tab (page
168).
2. Enter a name for the job in the Job Title box.
3. Either click the Save button to save the backup, or the Submit button to start
the backup job.
A job can be created and submitted this way very quickly, and because no Schedule
(or other) options have been set, the backup should run immediately using whatever
media (not in a Media Group) is available.

Windows 2000 Selection Options


The File System plugin for Windows 2000 operating systems allows you to choose
the System Settings directory, or any part of it, for backup. An expanded System
Settings directory is shown in the following figure:

The icons and files located in the System Settings directory appear only when that
particular service is running and can include all or a portion of the following:
n Registry
168 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

n Active Directory
n Cluster Database
n Certificate Server
n COM + class registration database
n Remote Storage Manager
n Remote Storage Manager Database
n IIS Metabase
n Disk Quota Database

Using the Backup Options Tab


When available for the type of NetVault plugin being used in the Selections tab, the
Backup Options tab allows extra information for the job to be specified.
The Backup Options tab for Windows NT is shown in the following example:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 169

The Backup Options tab for Windows 2000 is shown in the following example:

General Backup Options


The information available in the Backup Options tab is dependent on the type of
plugin in use in the Selections area. This includes:
n For a Windows NT or 2000 File System or UNIX File System plugin, the
settings available include the type of backup (e.g. Full, Incremental, etc.) and
whether you want to check for files being modified during backup.
n For some plugins, the settings available may include login details (e.g.
Connect As, Password) to allow access to the data selected for backup.
n For other plugins, there may be no backup options at all (e.g NetVault
Databases plugins)
The online Help System provides for specific Backup Options information for each
NetVault plugin. See Using Help (page 5) for instructions on accessing the help files.

Backup Type
When present, the Backup Type frame normally has two options:
n Full: When the selected Backup Type is Full, NetVault will perform a
complete backup of all data selected. The only exceptions are certain types of
data (often specific system files) which can never be backed up and will
170 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

produce warning messages in the Job Log if NetVault attempts to back them
up.
The Full backup type is always the default backup method, used when there
are no Backup Options displayed or they have not been explicitly set
n Incremental: When the selected Backup Type is Incremental, NetVault will
backup only data that has altered since a previous backup was completed.
There are two types of Incremental backup:
Changed since last backup - This Incremental backup type will only backup
data that has changed since the last backup, regardless of the type of backup
previously executed.
Changed since last FULL backup - This Incremental backup type will backup
all data that has changed since the last Full backup. This may include data that
has already been backed up by the Incremental backup type - Changed
since last backup.

WARNING: In order to perform an Incremental Backup, you MUST use a


Selection Set set up for a job using the Full backup type. Please refer to
Incremental Backup Procedure (page 179) for more information.

NetVault uses an innovative method of displaying Incremental backups in the


NetVault Restore window, allowing ALL data in the selection to restored in a single
Restore Job (regardless of what saveset actually contains the data). See Restoring
Incremental Backups (page 218).

Miscellaneous Switches
NetVault checks for files modified during a backup by reading the date and size of
the file being backed up before and after the backup is performed. By default, files
modified during the backup are not restored unless the Check for files being
modified during backup option is turned on. The backed up file is placed in the
backup index and is fully restorable. A modified file is displayed with a broken file
folder icon in the restore window.
The Windows 2000 plugin includes the option to Backup through Mount Points,
which is a drive attached to an empty folder on an NTFS volume. Mounted drives
function the same as any other drive, but are assigned a label or name instead of a
drive letter. The mounted drive’s name is resolved to a full file system path instead of
just a drive letter. If this option is cleared, only the mount information is backed up,
not the data on the mounted drive.

NOTE: If you have backed up data through a mount point, and then perform
a restore, NetVault restores the data to its original location.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 171

Windows NT Filesystem Backup Options


The NT Filesystem plugin uses Full and Incremental options, see Backup Type
(page 169).

The Ignore archive bit switch is available when Incremental Backup Type is
selected. When selected, this switch causes incremental data to be backed up,
regardless of the state of the archive bit.

Windows 2000 Filesystem Backup Options


The 2000 Filesystem plugin uses Full and Incremental options, see Backup Type
(page 169).

There is an additional area, Miscellaneous Switches, which include:


n Backup through Mount Points: When selected, the data that is on a
mounted drive is backed up. If this option is cleared and you back up a
mounted drive, only the path information for the mounted drive is backed up.
172 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

The Account Details area requires the following information when backing up
encrypted files:
n Username: The username of the Administrators group. This must be an
account in the group which has the “run as service” privilege.
n Password: The password for the Administrators username.
Some important information about the Windows 2000 File System plugin:
n Hard Links: When the first occurrence of a hard link is found, the data is
backed up. For all other occurrences, only the link is backed up. This data can
only be restored when the first occurrence exists; trying to restore subsequent
occurrences without the presence of the first causes the job to fail.
n Sparse files: A sparse file is a very large file created by application in such a
way that only limited disk space is needed (i.e. NTFS allocates disk space only
to the portions of a file that are written to). A backed up sparse file is restored
sparse rather than taking up the physical disk space for its size.
n NTFS-5 volume: A NetVault backup can be used to backup and restore NTFS
volumes. If you have backed up data from an NTFS volume used in Windows
2000, it is recommended that you restore the data to an NTFS volume used in
Windows 2000 to avoid losing data and some file and folder features. For
example, permissions, encrypting file system (EFS) settings, disk quota
information, mounted drive information, and Remote Storage information can
be lost if you back up data from an NTFS volume used in Windows 2000 and
then restore it to an NTFS or FAT volume used in Windows NT 4.0.

Unix Filesystem Backup Options


The UNIX Filesystem plugin uses Full and Incremental options, see Backup Type
(page 169).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 173

There is an additional area, Miscellaneous Switches, which can be dynamically


altered as necessary. A typical option provided here is:
Backup through NFS mounts? - When selected, this switch causes any NFS
mounts in the backup selection to be included in the backup. By default, this switch
is cleared, as normally the mounted system would be backed up via a NetVault
Client on that machine.

Using the Schedule Tab


The Schedule tab is used to set when the job is to run. Jobs can be scheduled to run
immediately, at a later date/time or when triggered by a command line or script
command. Options are also provided for setting a job to run once or to repeat. For
full information for both backup and restore job scheduling, see Scheduling Backup
& Restore Jobs (page 225).
The NetVault Backup window, Schedule tab, is shown in the following figure:
174 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

Using the Target Tab


The Target tab is used to set what the selected data is backed up on (or to). You may
target a particular Device or Media, and set parameters for General Options.
The NetVault Backup window, Target tab, is shown in the following figure:

The options available in the Target tab are:


n Device Options
n Media Options
n General Options

Target Device Options


n Any Device: When selected, NetVault uses an advanced algorithm to back up
using the most suitable device setup available for maximum efficiency. You
may use Specify Device to restrict this action.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 175

n Specify Device: When selected, all devices available to the NetVault Server
are displayed in the device area, as shown in the following figure:

To clear the library or drive selection, click the square to its left. NetVault will
use one of the selected devices (shown with a green check mark) to perform
the backup.

If you want to specify a target device using shared devices, see Shared
Devices (page 63).

Target Media Options


n Any Not in a group: When selected (the default), NetVault will use an
advanced algorithm to back up using the most suitable media available, which
is not in a group, for maximum efficiency. If ALL of your currently available
media has been allocated to a group using the Media Properties dialog box,
the backup will halt with the message Waiting for Media, unless blank media is
available.
176 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

n Any: When selected, NetVault will use an advanced algorithm to back up using
the most suitable media available to give maximum efficiency. You may use
other Media Options to restrict this action, as required.

n MID: When selected, click the down arrow to list and select the Media Label
(Media Identifier) of the specific item of media you would like to back up to.
NetVault will only use this media for the backup.

n Group Label: When selected, click the down arrow to list and select the Group
Label of the media you would like to back up to. NetVault will only use the
media belonging to this group for the backup.

n Label Media - Automatically label blank media: When cleared, suitable


labelled media must be available to NetVault or the backup will fail.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 177

When Label Media (Automatically label blank media) is selected, NetVault


automatically labels and uses blank media, when no other suitable media is
available for the job.

n Reuse Media: You can specify how media may be reused for the backup by
choosing one of the following options:

Never: Select if you never want any media marked for reuse to be used for
this backup.
Any: Select if you would like any media marked for reuse to be used for this
backup, if necessary.
With same group label as target media: (Target Media By Group only).
Select if you would like any media with the same Group Label, and marked for
reuse, to be used for this backup, if necessary.

Target - General Options


The General Options allow a user to administer and protect the way media is used.

The options available under General Options are:


n Specify minimum space required on media before backup: Allows you to
specify the minimum amount of space that a piece of media must have before
it is used (in Megabytes).
n Protect media from further writes after backup: This option can be used to
stop any further backups from being placed on that media.
n Ensures this backup is the first on the media: This option ensures that the
backup is the first one on the media.
178 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

Advanced Options
The Advanced Options tab provides options used only for advanced functions,
including setting Backup Life, Compression, Verification, Duplication, Pre and Post
Scripts. For more information, refer to Chapter 16 - Using Advanced Features (page
271)
The Advanced Options tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Savesets
In the Selection, Schedule, Target Client and Advanced Options tabs you can save
the set of options specified, load an existing set of options and modify a loaded set of
options. These sets are known as Policy Sets and are managed from the individual
tabs in the Backup and Restore windows or from the Policy Management window.
The following figure shows an example of the controls used to perform activities on
sets in the Backup window:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 179

Complete information on using sets can be found in Using Policy (Set) Templates
(page 263).

Incremental Backup Procedure


An Incremental backup job is always related to a previous backup job of the same selection.
For File System backups, NetVault uses a Selection Set common to the Full and
Incremental backup jobs as its method of relating the jobs to each other. Some software
APM’s do not use this method (e.g. Microsoft Exchange); please check the online help
information.
It is normal to schedule a weekly backup schedule comprising:
n A series of Full backup jobs to run once a week (e.g. on a Friday night, Saturday or
Sunday).
n A series of Incremental backup jobs to run on other working days (e.g. Monday,
Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday) for each data selection for which there is a Full
backup job.
This minimizes the amount of data being backed up, shortens the time required for the
backup window and reduces the media requirements.

Creating a Typical Weekly Full and Incremental Schedule


To set up a typical weekly schedule of Full and Incremental backups for a File
System plugin (NT or UNIX), use the following steps:
1. Create a new backup job in the NetVault Backup window for a Full backup
2. Select the data to be backed up in the Selections tabbed area (if doing a file
system backup, this is normally a complete drive, or one or more directories).
You may exclude certain files and/or directories in the selection, in the normal
manner (shown with a red cross). It is recommended that you exclude the
Recycled bin under NT and the /proc directory under UNIX, in addition to temp
or tmp directories.
3. Save the Selection Set with a suitable name.
4. Set up any other required options on the other tabbed areas, ensuring that Full
Backup Type is selected on the Backup Options tab (the default option), and
that the Schedule tab is set as appropriate (e.g. Repeating every Friday at
23:00).
5. Enter a descriptive name for the job in the Job Title box; one that indicates
what is being backed up and that it is a Full backup.
6. Submit the Job (but do not close the NetVault Backup window).
7. Change the Backup Type in the Backup Options tab to either Incremental,
Changed since last backup or Incremental, Changed since last FULL
backup, as appropriate.
180 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

8. Change the Schedule as appropriate (e.g. to Repeating every Monday,


Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday at 23:00). If required, you may change any
other tabbed areas, as appropriate.
9. Edit a descriptive job name in the Job Title box to replace the indication of Full
backup type to the Incremental sub-type you have chosen (e.g. Inc_CSLBU, as
an abbreviation for Incremental, Changed since last backup).
10. Submit the Job.
The job will be saved under a new Job Number because the Job Title has been
changed.
You can use the Consolidate Backups plugin to combine Incremental Backups
instead of doing periodic Full backups. For more information, see Using the
Consolidate File System Backups Plugin (page 182).

Restoring Incremental Backups


NetVault uses an innovative method of displaying Incremental backups in the NetVault
Restore window, allowing ALL data in the selection to restored be in a single restore job
(regardless of what saveset actually contains the data). See Restoring Incremental Backups
(page 218) for more information.

Doing a Simple Backup


The NetVault Backup window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting backup
jobs for any NetVault client.
The simplest form of backup (described here) is for the NetVault server to backup itself as a
NetVault client. In this case, the NetVault client in the Selections tab will be an identical name
to the selected NetVault server.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 181

Note that no network is required for this type of backup as long as the device is locally
connected.

To use the File System plugin to do a new backup, the basic procedure is detailed below.
Before trying this procedure, ensure that you have successfully added a device (as detailed
in Setting up a Device (page 63) and have blank media (or media with a NetVault label and
sufficient space left) inserted in the device.
1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the
command toolbars, or by choosing Operations Backup.
2. In the Selections tab, open the client to be backed up.
3. Open the File System Plugin to display all drives and devices which may be
backed up on the selected client.
4. Select the data to be backed up, drives, directories and files, as required.
For this simple backup, you can ignore the Backup settings on the Backup
Options, Schedule, Target and Advanced Options tabs.
5. Enter a name for the job in the Job Title box.
6. Submit the backup by clicking the Submit button or by choosing Accept
Submit Backup.
This simple backup will run immediately (i.e. it will be scheduled to run as soon
as possible, using whatever device and media are available).
The progress of the job can be viewed in the NetVault Server Status window (or
in the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window) by selecting the job and
choosing the Monitor Job command to display the Monitor Job information.
182 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin


The Consolidate File System Backups plugin is designed to eliminate the need to do Full
backups. It produces a Full backup by using any number of incremental savesets back to the
last Full backup performed. The resulting saveset is the same as a Full backup performed at
the same time the last incremental was performed.
No special skills are required for routine backup operations or for using the plugin.

Installing the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin


The Consolidate File System Backups plugin is included and automatically installed
when you install NetVault and no further installation activity is required.

How the Plugin Works


Follow the steps in this example to understand how the Consolidate File System
Backups plugin operates:
Day of the
Operation Performed
Week
Monday Full Backup
Tuesday Incremental
Wednesday Incremental
Thursday Incremental
Friday Incremental
Saturday Consolidate - This produces a Full backup from Friday’s
Incremental back to and including Monday’s Full backup.
Monday Incremental
Tuesday Incremental
Wednesday Incremental
Thursday Incremental
Friday Incremental
Saturday Consolidate - This produces a Full backup from Friday’s
Incremental back to and including the Full backup produced
by the Consolidate performed on Saturday.

Consolidating Backups
NetVault consolidates File System backups using the incremental backups
performed since the last full backup and creates a new full backup.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 183

To perform a consolidation of File System backups using the “Consolidate File


System Backups" Plugin, follow these steps:
1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the
command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. The
NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.
2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or
double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.
184 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

3. Double-click the Consolidate File System Backups plugin to open and display
the Filesystem Backups folders:

4. Double-click each folder or file to open and display the backup savesets or
backup sets that you want to consolidate.
If you are consolidating with backups, proceed to the section Consolidating with
Backups (page 185). To consolidate with Backup Sets go to Consolidating with
Backup Sets (page 186).
5. Enter the name of the job in the Job Title box.
6. Submit the backup job by clicking the Submit button on the command toolbar.
See your NetVault Administrator’s Guide for information on viewing the job
status, progress and log.

NOTE: It is important to note that two devices are required to perform a


consolidated filesystem backup.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 185

Consolidating with Backups


A completely expanded Backup folder appears as shown in the following figure:

The Filesystem Backups folder lists all incremental backups performed on the client
using the File System plugin. When you choose one of the savesets, NetVault
consolidates all previous incremental savesets back to the last full backup created,
resulting in a Full backup from the selected incremental’s date.
All Full backups produced when selecting an individual incremental backup are
archived and, therefore, will not affect the life of the last Full backup.
To consolidate with a Backup:
1. Select the desired backup saveset.
2. Select any additional options and click Submit.
186 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

Consolidating with Backup Sets


The Backup Sets folder lists the Selection Sets used in backing up File System data,
similar to that shown in the following figure:

The Filesystem Backup Sets folder lists the Selection Sets used to perform backups
for the selected client. When you choose one of the Sets, NetVault finds the
incremental savesets produced using that Selection Set back to the last Full backup
created, and produces a new, Full backup.
This new Full backup is not an archive and does affect the life of the last Full backup
performed.
To consolidate with a Backup Set:
1. Select the desired Backup Set.
2. Select any additional options and click Submit.

Using the Raw Device Plugin


The Raw Device plugin, included with your NetVault installation, is used to backup and
restore physical disks and/or partitions.
No special skills are required for routine backup operations or for using the plugin.

Installing the Raw Device Plugin


The Raw Device plugin is included and automatically installed when you install
NetVault and no further installation activity is required. If you remove this plugin and
later wish to use it again, you must reinstall NetVault.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 187

Using the Raw Device Plugin for NT


The Raw Device plugin for Windows NT provides the ability to back up and restore
any physical disk or partition thereof. Partitions can be in any WinNT format (i.e.,
NTFS, HPFS or FAT).

NT Raw Device Backups


To perform a raw device backup in Windows NT, follow these steps:
1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the
command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. The
NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.
2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or
double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.
3. Continue double-clicking each item until the desired disk/partition is displayed.
4. Select the items to be backed up. An example of Partition 2 (disk D) on Physical
Disk 0 is shown in the following figure:
188 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

5. Click the Backup Options tab to display the Raw Device backup options shown in
the following figure:

Options available in the Backup Options tab include:


n Backup Reported Disk Size: NetVault requests the size of the disk from the
operating system and only backs up that amount of data. The advantage of this
option is that a restore to another hard disk is possible if the reported sizes are
the same, even if the actual sizes differ slightly. It is possible for applications to
use the disk beyond the end of the reported size when using it for raw data. If
this is the case, it is recommended that you use the Backup Entire Contents
option.
n Backup Entire Contents: With this option selected, NetVault backs up the
whole disk, even if it must read past the end of the reported size.
6. Continue selecting any desired job options and click Submit to start the backup
job.

CAUTION: When backing up a raw partition, it is important to ensure that it is not


in use. Backing up a partition in use may result in a corrupted backup.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 189

NT Raw Device Restores


When restoring backed up data using the Raw Device plugin, note the following
information:
n If you are restoring a single drive (e.g., the C drive) then the target device
must have a drive with same name.
n The target disk for a restore must be at least the same size (or larger than) the
data being restored.
n A backed up master boot record can be restored to a different location without
having to create the individual records or partitions.
n You can relocate backed up data to a designated disk number and partition.
You must identify the target location by entering a disk identification and a
partition number.
n A master boot backup can be relocated to any disk number, but must be
placed on that disk as the zero (0) partition. When you restoring an entire disk
you only need to identify the disk number.
To perform a restore using the Raw Device plugin, follow these steps:
1. Open the NetVault Restore window by clicking the Restore button on the
command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Restore command.
2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or
double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.
3. Double-click the Raw Device plugin to display the list of Savesets available for
restore.
4. Continue double-clicking until the desired disk/partition is displayed.
190 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

5. Select the items to be restored. An example of the selection of Physical Disk 0,


Partition 1 is shown in the following figure:

To restore the data to a different location, follow these additional steps:


6. Right-click the selected data and choose Rename, as shown in the following
figure:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 191

The Restore - Rename dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure:

7. Select the Relocate To check box and enter the desired location in the edit box.
You must identify the target location by entering a disk identification and a
partition number. This can be in the format shown in the example (e.g., Disk1
Partition4) or as just the disk and partition numbers (e.g., 1 4). In each case the
entries must be separated by a space.
When the data being restored is relocated/renamed, the Restore Selections tab
appears similar to the following example:
192 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

8. Click the Target Client tab and select the client where the backed up data will be
restored, as shown in the following figure:

9. There are no Restore Options for the Raw Device plugin. Select any other
settings as desired.
10. Enter a Job Title in the edit box.
11. Click the Submit button to start the job.

Using the Raw Device Plugin for UNIX


The Raw Device plugin for UNIX provides the ability to back up and restore character
and block devices.

UNIX Raw Device Backups


To perform a Raw Device backup in UNIX, follow these steps:

CAUTION: Always unmount the file system before you back it up using the Raw
Device plugin. If the file system remains mounted, and is accessed before the
backup completes, the backup may be corrupted. In this case the disk is marked
dirty after a restore and you must perform a file system check.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 193

1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the
command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. The
NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.
2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or
double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.
3. Continue double-clicking each item in the tree to display the devices you want to
backup, as shown in the following figure:

4. There are no Backup Options for the Raw Device plugin on UNIX. Continue
selecting any desired job options in the Schedule, Target or Advanced Options
tabs.
5. Enter a Job Title in the edit box.
6. Click Submit to start the backup job.
194 Chapter 10
Backing Up Data

UNIX Raw Device Restores


To perform a restore using the Raw Device plugin, follow these steps:
1. Open the NetVault Restore window by clicking the Restore button on the
command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Restore command. The
NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.
2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or
double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.
3. Double-click the Raw Device plugin, and each item in its tree, to display the list of
Savesets available for restore, as shown in the following figure:

4. Select the data you want to restore.


NetVault Administrator’s Guide 195

To restore the data to a different location, follow these additional steps:


5. Right-click the selected data and choose Rename, as shown in the following
figure:

The Restore - Rename dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure:

6. Select the Relocate To check box and enter the desired location in the edit box.
You must identify the target location by entering the full path to the new location.
7. There are no Restore Options for the Raw Device plugin. Select any other
settings in the Target Client, Schedule or Advanced Options tabs as desired.
8. Enter a Job Title in the edit box.
9. Click the Submit button to start the job.
CHAPTER 11

Restoring Data
Restoring Data - 199
The NetVault Restore Window - 199
n Restore Window Buttons - 200
n Window Tabs - 200
n Menu Commands - 201
n Using the Selections Tab - 202
n Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection - 205
n Using the Restore Search Facility - 209
n Using Restore Filter Options - 210
n Using the Restore Options Tab - 212
n Using the Target Client Tab - 215
n Using the Schedule Tab - 216
n Using the Advanced Options Tab - 217
n Savesets - 218
Restoring Incremental Backups - 218
Doing a Simple Restore - 221
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 199

Restoring Data
A NetVault Restore is the name given for the transfer of data from the backup device (which
holds the required data) to the NetVault client. The device's media stores the data, where it
can be recovered from by NetVault. Note that the NetVault server itself also acts as a
NetVault client so that it may restore data to itself.

The NetVault Restore Window


The NetVault Restore window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting restore
jobs for any NetVault client controlled by the selected NetVault server.
Most restores are easy to create and submit. The NetVault Restore window provides access
to a number of control functions, some of which are required only under special
circumstances.
The NetVault Restore window appears as shown in the following figure:

NOTE: With some optional NetVault plugins (particularly for certain


databases) it is necessary to run NetVault restores entirely from the external
software without using the NetVault Restore window.
200 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

Restore Window Buttons


There are four buttons at the top of the Restore window that perform the following
functions:
Click this
To do this:
button
Clear any current NetVault Restore selections and control set-
tings and create a New Restore Job. Remember that you can
NEW create and save a restore job without submitting it.

Load an existing restore job, so that it may be modified, cop-


ied, re-saved under the current or a new job number and sub-
mitted. It is often easier to re-load a restore job by first finding it
LOAD in the list in the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab list, selecting it
and then choosing Edit/Modify. For more information, see
Using the Jobs Tab (page 245).
Save the current restore job. Remember that you can access
the saved job via the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab, as well
SAVE as clicking the Load button to reload it. It is very important for
good restore management that you save a restore job with a
meaningful name as a Job Title. For more information, see
Using the Jobs Tab (page 245).
Add the job to the scheduled jobs list (except for triggered jobs
which are just saved). Scheduled jobs are listed on the Status
SUBMIT tab of the NetVault Jobs window and the Job Status area of
the NetVault Server Status window. For more information, see
Using The Status Tab (page 242).

Window Tabs
The following tabs appear on the window:
n Selections: Used to select the data to be restored, using the appropriate
NetVault Plugin or APM. Some NetVault Plugins are provided as part of the
standard installation, while APM’s are only available if installed separately. For
more information, see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).
n Restore Options: The Restore Options tab allows extra information for the job
to be specified, depending on the NetVault Plugin in use in the Selections tab.
For a description of the more standard options, see Using the Restore Options
Tab (page 212).
n Target Client: Used to set which NetVault Client the data is to be restored to.
You may Target any Client in the NetVault Domain of the selected NetVault
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 201

Server. This option should only be used with caution, see Using the Target
Client Tab (page 215) for more information.
n Schedule: Used to specify when the job is to run. Jobs can be scheduled to
run immediately, at a later date/time or run when triggered by a command line
or script command. You can also set a job to run once or to repeat. For full
information for both Backup and Restore JOB scheduling, see Using the
Schedule Tab (page 216).
n Advanced Options: The options in the Advanced Options tab are only used
for advanced functions, including setting Compression, Pre and Post Scripts.

Menu Commands
The Menu Bar in the NetVault Restore window provides access to the commands
described in the following table:
Choose this
Menu To do this:
command:
File New Creates a new restore job.
Load Opens the Load Restore Job dialog
box where you can select a saved job
that you want to run again.
Save Saves the current restore job and
assigns a job name.
Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box where
you can select the desired printer and
specify its properties.
Close Close the Restore window.
View Selections Open the Selections tab.
Restore Options Open the Restore Options tab.
Schedule Open the Schedule tab.
Target Open the Target tab.
Advanced Options Open the Advanced Options tab.
Accept Submit Restore Starts the restore job.
Help Current Topic Display a description of and help for
the current focus item.
Help Contents Display the Help Contents.
202 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

Using the Selections Tab


The Selections tab is used to select the data to be restored, using the appropriate
NetVault Plugin or APM. Some NetVault Plugins are provided as part of the standard
installation, while APM’s are only available if installed separately. For more
information, see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).
The Selections tab of the Restore window appears as shown in the following figure:

Selecting the Data to be Restored


The exact method used to select the data to be restored depends on the type of
NetVault Plugin being used. Refer to Using Help (page 5) to get more information on
the online Plugin Help installed with the plugin. Some standard methods are detailed
here.

Windows File System Plugin Data Selection Example


The following example demonstrates data selection using the Plugin Selection
Method for Windows NT and 2000. For information on other methods, refer to Setting
Restore Selection Method (page 208).
1. Select the Client, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the client).
2. Select the Plugin, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the plugin).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 203

3. Select the backup saveset containing the data to be restored, right-click and
choose Open (or double-click it). If you are not sure if the saveset contains the
data you are looking for, you can use the Search facility. For more information,
see Using the Restore Search Facility (page 209).

4. Double-click the drive to open it. You can select the drive to be restored by
clicking the square to its left. A selected item is indicated with a green check
mark.
5. Double-click the directory, and each subsequent level until the data you want to
restore is displayed. Select the directory to be restored by clicking the square to
its left.
The restore tree for this example saveset has now been fully expanded. The
Search command allows you to search a particular saveset for a specific item
204 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

backed up. This is useful when a large number of directories and files are
present; it does not search the selected file!

6. Select the data to be restored by clicking the square to the left of each item. In
the following figure, the complete drive backup is selected:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 205

If you do not wish to include a file (or directory tree) in the selection, click the
square to the left of the item until the red X appears:

Once the data has been selected, right-click and choose Rename on the
highest level selected. See Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection (page
205).

Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection


After the data to be restored has been selected, you may be able to Rename (or
Relocate) it by choosing the Rename command in the pop-up menu of the highest
level selected in the Selections tree.

NOTE: This function does not operate for ALL NetVault plugins, but is useful
for a File System restore (e.g. NT or UNIX File System plugin).

Here are some examples of Rename being used at different levels under the NT
File System Plugin:

Renaming a Drive for Restore


1. Select the drive, right-click and choose Rename.
206 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

2. Click the square and enter the designated drive for the backup to be restored to
(e.g. F:\ or F:) in the Rename to box. In the special case of drives ONLY,
Rename to and Relocate to have an identical function.

WARNING: The drive specified must exist or the restore will fail.

Renaming a Directory for Restore


1. Select the directory, right-click and choose Rename.

The Restore Rename dialog box opens.

To Rename: Select the Rename to check box and enter the desired name for
the restored backed up directory (e.g., _test9).

WARNING: Do not enter a path here or the restore will fail.


NetVault Administrator’s Guide 207

To Relocate: Select the Relocate to check box and enter the path to the
location where the backed up directory is to be restored (e.g. E:\temp).

WARNING: The path entered must exist at run-time or the restore will fail.

Renaming a File for Restore


1. Select the file, right-click and choose Rename.

The Restore Rename dialog box opens.

To Rename: Select the Rename to check box and enter the filename for the
backed up file to be renamed when it is restored (e.g. new_simple.htm).

WARNING: Do not enter a path here or the restore will fail.

To Relocate: Select the Relocate to check box and enter the path for the
location where the backed up file is to be restored (e.g. E:\_test2).

WARNING: The path entered must exist at run-time or the restore will fail.
208 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

Setting Restore Selection Method


You may change the Selection Method by selecting a different option from the list:

The differences between Selection Methods is explained below:


n Plugin Selection Method: This is the default method which works with any
backup.

n Backup Set Selection Method: Shows backups saved using a Backup Set.
For more information, see Using Policy (Set) Templates (page 263).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 209

n Job Selection Method: This method lists the backups by Job Title and works
with any backup.

Using the Restore Search Facility


NetVault provides a Restore Search facility to quickly examine the NetVault
Database and identify which backup saveset(s) data has been backed up in. With
the Restore facility, you will find it easier to select the required data to restore.
You can search for data in many ways. The Search String entry field supports both
Basic and Regular Expressions search options.

Example of Basic Search


The following example shows a Basic search expression:

This example shows a search for J?rgen*.doc. This search could be used to find all
backed up document files for Jurgen or Jergen - the star (*) before the extension
allows numbered files to be included in the search results, e.g:
Jurgen.doc
Jurgen_02.doc
Jurgen_03.doc
Jergen_04.doc
210 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

etc.
This example uses:
n A star (*) character to represent any number of characters.
n A question mark (?) character to represent any single character.
This search will not find Juegen.doc because the specified search string asks for an
r in the third position of the file name.
Regular Expression Search
With Regular Expression Search selected, you can enter a Regular Expression in
the Search String. For more information, refer to Using Regular Expressions (page
315).
Other Search Types
n Search. If you select Search at the relevant Search Level to set the scope (or
boundary) containing the backed up data you are looking for.
n Client Level Search. If you select Search from a Client pop-up menu, ALL
Savesets for the selected Client will be searched in all installed plugins.
n Plugin Level Search. If you select Search from a Plugin pop-up menu, ALL
Savesets for the selected Plugin (under the relevant client) will be searched.
n Saveset Level Search. If you select Search from a Saveset pop-up menu, a
single selected Saveset under the relevant client and plugin will be searched.
You can also select Saveset Level Search from the pop-up menu of any
selected drive, directory or file in the tree under the Saveset; only ONE
Saveset is searched.

Using Restore Filter Options


The data displayed in the Restore Options tab can be filtered using the options under
Filter Options. By default, no filtering is selected.

Choose the type of Filter Options you require:


n By Date Range
n Show On-line Status
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 211

or choose to Remove Filtering that has already been applied.

Filter By Date Range


1. Select By Date Range and enter the required From and To dates. An example
of all the data listed is shown in the following figure:

2. Click the Apply Filter button. Only the data whose dates fall inside the specified
date range are displayed, as shown in the following figure:
212 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

Show On-Line Status


1. Select the Show On-line Status check box.
2. Click the Apply Filter button. The backup saveset icon of On-line media is
displayed with a green flash indicator as shown in the following figure:

Using the Restore Options Tab


When available for the type of NetVault plugin being used in the Selections area,
the Restore Options tab allows extra information for the job to be specified. For a File
System restore (e.g. NT, 2000 or UNIX File System plugin), the settings available
include whether or not to overwrite newer files, create backup files and restore files
modified during backup and others. For some NetVault plugins, the settings available
may include login details (e.g. Connect As, Password) to allow access to the client
area that you wish to restore to.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 213

The following figure is an example of the Windows NT Backup Options:

For information on the specific Restore Options available for data selected in the
Selections area using a particular NetVault plugin, please refer to the online Plugin
Help which is installed with the plugin. Some standard options are detailed on the
next page.

Types of Restore Options


The standard restore options differ, depending on the operating system in use.
Windows NT File System Plugin Restore Options are shown in the following figure:

n By selecting Overwrite newer files, NetVault overwrites any files being


restored of the same name, in the same path, on the target system (this is the
default action). With Overwrite newer files cleared, no newer files will be
overwritten.
214 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

n By selecting Create backup files, NetVault renames the existing copies of any
files being restored with a '.bak' extension, before the restored file is written.
With Create backup files cleared, no backup files will be created.
n By selecting Restore files modified during backup, NetVault restores a file
modified during a backup. A broken file icon indicates that a file was modified
during a backup.
Windows 2000 File System plugin Restore Options include those in the Windows NT
File System Options and many more, as shown in the following figure:

NOTE: If you have backed up data through a mount point, and then perform
a restore, NetVault restores the data to its original location.

Encrypted data remains encrypted after the restore is performed. The Account
Details area information is required when restoring encrypted files:
n Username: The username of the Administrators group. This must be an
account in the group which has the “run as service” privilege.
n Password: The password for the Administrators username.
The Registry Files area allows you to:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 215

n Update active registry: Enables the update of an active registry. To restore


the active registry the system must be rebooted in Active Directory Restore
Mode.
n Restore to file: When this option is selected, data can be restored and/or
renamed to a specified location.
The Cluster Database area provides the options to:
n Force cluster database restore: If another node in the cluster has a copy of
the cluster database and the system thinks this is the best copy, it will
overwrite the newly restored copy. Select this option to prevent the newly
restored copy from being overwritten.
n Use original cluster database location: Select this option only when you
want to designate a new location for the restored data.
n Cluster Quorum Drive Letter: When specifying a new location, enter the
drive letter in the edit box.
Two additional settings in the Restore Options tab for Windows 2000 are:
n Apply changes made subsequent to Active Directory backup: Applies
changes made to the System State data since the backup was performed.
n Apply changes mad subsequent to Certificate Server backup: Applies
changes made to the Certification Services log files made since the backup
was performed.
UNIX Filesystem Restore Options include those shown in the Windows NT
Filesystem Options and include one additional option, shown in the following figure:

n With Reset file datestamps cleared, files will be restored with a current
datestamp. By selecting Reset file datestamps, all files will be restored with
the datestamp they were backed up with.

Using the Target Client Tab


The Target Client tab is used to set which NetVault client the data is to be restored
to. You may Target any Client in the NetVault domain of the selected NetVault
server. This option should be used with caution.
216 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

The Target Client tab appears as shown in the following figure:

The top NetVault client is always the NetVault server itself, acting as a NetVault
client. With no clients selected, all restores are targeted to the client selected in the
Selections tab. To target a specific client, select the check box to its left - selection of
all other clients will then be barred with a stop sign or be greyed out.

Using the Schedule Tab


The Schedule tab is used to specify when the job is to run. Jobs can be scheduled to
run immediately, at a later date/time or when triggered by a command line or script
command. Options are also provided for setting a job to run once or to repeat. For
full information for both backup and restore job scheduling, see Scheduling Backup
& Restore Jobs (page 225).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 217

The Schedule tab of the Restore window appears as shown in the following figure:

Using the Advanced Options Tab


The Advanced Options tab provides options only used for advanced functions,
including setting Compression and Pre and Post Scripts. The use of these functions
is detailed in Using Advanced Features (page 271).
218 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

The Advanced Options tab of the Restore window appears as shown in the following
figure:

Savesets
In the Selection, Schedule, Target Client and Advanced Options tabs you can save
the set of options specified, load an existing set of options and modify a loaded set of
options. These sets are known as Policy Sets and are managed from the individual
tabs in the Backup and Restore windows or from the Policy Management window.
The following figure shows an example of the controls used to perform activities on
sets in the Backup window:

Complete information on using sets can be found in Using Policy (Set) Templates
(page 263).

Restoring Incremental Backups


NetVault uses an innovative method of displaying Incremental backups in the NetVault
Restore window, allowing ALL data in the selection to restored in a single restore job,
regardless of what saveset actually contains the data.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 219

The following example demonstrates how this concept works and included partial views of
the NetVault Media Management and NetVault Restore windows. It might at first seem a
little complex, but once you understand the principle and functionality provided, it should
become clear how to select the required data for restore.
1. A directory was created, E:\test, containing a single file file1.bin, about
320 Kbytes. The directory was then backed up using a Selection Set and Full
backup type (Job ID 24, stored as Saveset 46).
The backup saveset in the NetVault Media Management window displays a
Segment 1 Length of 320 Kbytes:

The directory in the NetVault Restore window displays the single file
file1.bin in the directory, which may be selected for restore:
The file1.bin file is obviously part of the Full backup.

2. A new file file2.bin, about 320 Kbytes, was added to the directory E:\test,
so the directory now contains two files, a total of 640 Kbytes. The directory was
then backed up with the same Selection Set, but this time using a Incremental,
Changed since last backup backup type (Job ID 25, stored as Saveset 47).
The backup saveset in the NetVault Media Management window displays a
Segment 1 Length of 320 Kbytes (as only file file2.bin has changed):
220 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

The directory in the NetVault Restore window displays BOTH files file1.bin
and file2.bin in the directory, which may be selected for restore.
The file2.bin file is part of the first Incremental, Changed since last
backup backup (Job ID 25, stored as Saveset 47). The file1.bin file is
actually part of the Full backup (Job ID 24, stored as Saveset 46), but is also
displayed under Saveset 47 so any file in the directory at the time of backup can
be selected for restore.

3. A new file file3.bin, about 320 Kbytes, was added to the directory E:\test,
so the directory now contains three files, a total of 960 Kbytes. Files file1.bin
and file2.bin where then both edited and re-saved so that they changed. The
directory was then backed up using the same Selection Set and Incremental,
Changed since last backup backup job (Job ID 25, this time stored as Saveset
48).
The backup saveset in the NetVault Media Management window displays a
Segment 1 Length of 960 Kbytes (as all files: file1.bin, file2.bin and
file3.bin have changed):
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 221

The directory in the NetVault Restore window displays ALL files file1.bin,
file2.bin and file3.bin in the directory, which may be selected for
restore.
This time all files file1.bin, file2.bin and file3.bin are part of the
second Incremental, Changed since last backup backup (Job ID 25, stored
as Saveset 48). Again, any file in the directory at the time of backup can be
selected for restore.

Files can be selected for restore, as detailed in the Windows File System Plugin
Data Selection Example (page 202).

Doing a Simple Restore


The NetVault Restore window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting restore
jobs for any NetVault client.
The simplest form of restore (described here) is for the NetVault server to restore files to
itself as a NetVault client. In this case, the NetVault client in the Selections tab will be an
identical name to the selected NetVault server (i.e. richard in this example).
222 Chapter 11
Restoring Data

Note that no network is required for this type of restore as long as the device is locally
connected

To use the File Systems plugin to do a new restore, the basic procedure is detailed below.
Before trying this procedure, ensure that you have the same device configuration and media
as used for the backup. This simple procedure will overwrite any newer data with the data
stored on the media, so ensure that you are not overwriting anything that matters.
1. Open the NetVault Restore window by clicking the Restore button on the
command toolbars, or by choosing Operations Restore.
2. In the Selections tab, open the client that was backed up.
3. Open the File Systems plugin to display all backup savesets and then open the
backup saveset containing the data to be restored.
4. Select the data to be restored, drives, directories and files, as required.
For this simple restore, you can ignore the Restore settings on the Restore
Options, Schedule, Target and Advanced Options tabs.
5. Enter a name for the job in the Job Title box.
6. Submit the restore by clicking the Submit button or by choosing Accept Submit
Restore.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 223

This simple restore will run immediately (i.e. it will be scheduled to run as soon
as possible). Note that the simple restore will use the default Restore Option of
Overwrite newer files.
The progress of the job can be viewed in the NetVault Server Status window (or
in the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window) by selecting the job and
choosing the Monitor Job command to open the Monitor Job information.
CHAPTER 12

Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs


Scheduling Jobs - 227
n Schedule Options - 227
n Using Schedule - Immediate - 228
n Using Schedule - Once - 228
n Using Schedule - Repeating - 232
n Using Schedule - Triggered - 237
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 227

Scheduling Jobs
You can set up your backup and restore jobs to run at various times. The Schedule tab of
both the Backup and Restore windows provides access to the scheduling options.
An example of the Schedule tab from the NetVault Backup window is shown in the following
figure:

The options on the window are:

Schedule Options
The Schedule tab on both the Backup and Restore windows have identical option
buttons to select the main functions:
228 Chapter 12
Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

The main schedule functions are:


n Immediate: Runs the job only once and as soon as possible. When submitted,
the job is immediately added to the job queue and runs as soon as the right
device/media combination is available.
n Once: Runs a single scheduled function only once.

NOTE: Note that once means only one backup, or the FIRST scheduled.

n Repeating: Runs a function whenever the specified hour, day, week, or month
occurs.

NOTE: Note that Repeating means that the selection will continue repeating
until discontinued. You can put a temporary Hold on a repeating job, and
resume a held job, through the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window.

n Triggered: Runs a job only when triggered by a special nvtrigger command.


Using Schedule - Immediate
When selecting the Immediate option, NetVault will execute, only once, the required
NetVault function. If the resources (media, device, etc.) are available and no other
job is running, the NetVault function will take place immediately. If there is a job
running or a job scheduled that takes precedence, the job will join a queue until it is
able to run.

Using Schedule - Once


The Once schedule option is used to execute a single scheduled function for the
FIRST scheduled day or date specified.
Note that once means only one backup, or the FIRST scheduled.
Depending on the Method selected, additional information may be required. Options
appearing on the Schedule tab for a single, non-recurring job are:

Method
Available options in the Method area are:
n Any Day: A job scheduled to run Once, Any Day depends on the
hour/minute entered in the Run at boxes , and
the day/month/year entered in the From boxes
.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 229

n Days of week: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the week will run
the first time that day occurs in the month. This type of job depends on the
days selected in the Options list of days:

When the Days of week is the selected method, you can specify the Days in
Month as All or Selected.

n Days of month: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the month will
run on the days selected:

n Specified Date: A job scheduled to run on a specified date depends on the


day/month/year entered in the Options date boxes:
230 Chapter 12
Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

Examples of Using Once Scheduling


n Example 1: Days of the week
To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on All Saturdays during May 2000 From 11
May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on 13 May 2000 ONLY):

n Example 2: Days of the week


To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on All Sundays, Tuesdays and Thursdays
during May 2000, From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on
14 May 2000 ONLY).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 231

n Example 3: Days of the week


To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on Selected Second and Last Saturdays
during May 2000, From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on 13 May 2000
ONLY).

n Example 4: Days of the week


To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on Selected Third and Last Sundays,
Tuesdays and Thursdays during May 2000, From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job will
run ONCE on 14 May 2000 ONLY).
232 Chapter 12
Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

n Example 5: Days of Month


To schedule a job at 10:29 on the 10 September 1998 the 10 in Options is
selected (the 26 has also been selected to explain the effect this has):

The From field displays a date of 27 Aug 1998. Because the first specified day
of the month is 10, the job will be run in September rather than August.
Only the first date number in Options (in this case 10) after the date number in
the From field (in this case 27) is used; any other dates entered in Options
(e.g. 26 in our example) are ignored.

Using Schedule - Repeating


The Repeating option is used to execute a repeating scheduled function for each
scheduled hour, day, week, or month specified.

NOTE: Note that Repeating means that the selection will continue repeating
until discontinued. You can put a temporary Hold on a repeating job, and
resume a held job, through the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 233

Depending on the Method selected, additional information may be required. Options


appearing on the Schedule tab for a repeating job are:

Method
Available options in the Method area are:
n Every Day: A job scheduled to repeat Every Day will run every
day at the hour/minute specified in the Run at boxes
and begin on the day/month/year specified in the From boxes

.
n Days of week: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the week will run
the first time that day occurs in the month. This type of job depends on the
days selected in the Options list of days:

When the Days of week is the selected Method, you can specify the Days in
Month as All or Selected.
234 Chapter 12
Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

n Days of month: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the month will run
on the days selected:

n Every. . . : A job scheduled to run at a specified option, including every hour,


day, week, and month:

Examples of Using Repeating Scheduling


n Example 1: Days of the week
To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on All Saturdays during each month
From 1 Nov 1998 (i.e. job will run on 7, 14, 21, 28 November 1998, then on 5,
12, 19, 26 December 1998, then on 2, 9, 16, 23, 30 January 1999, etc.):
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 235

n Example 2: Days of the week


To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on All Sundays, Tuesdays and
Thursdays during each month From 10 Dec 1998 (i.e. job will run on 10, 13,
15, 17, 20, 22, 24, 27, 29, 31 December 1998, then on 3, 5, 7, 10, 12, 14, 17,
19, 21, 24, 26, 28, 31 January 1999, etc.).

n Example 3: Days of the week


To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on Selected Second and Last
Saturdays during each month From 1 Nov 1998 (i.e. job will run on 14, 28
November 1998, then on 12, 26 December 1998, then on 9, 30 January 1999,
etc.).
236 Chapter 12
Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

n Example 4: Days of the week


To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on Selected Third and Last Sundays,
Tuesdays and Thursdays during each month From 10 Dec 1998 (i.e. job will
run on 15, 17, 20, 27, 29, 31 December 1998, then on 17, 19, 21, 26, 28, 31
January 1999, etc.):

n Example 5: Days of month


To schedule a job at 10:29 on the 10 and 26 of each month, From 27 Aug
1998:

Note that the From field has a date of 27 Aug 1998. Because the first day of
the month selected is 10, the job runs first in September rather than August. If
the From field had a date of 12 Aug 1998, the job would be run at 10:29 on the
26 August 1998, then at 10:29 on the 10 September 1998, then at 10:29 on the
26 September 1998, then at 10:29 on the 10 October 1998, etc.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 237

Using Schedule - Triggered


The Triggered option is used to schedule the job to be started by the nvtrigger
command in the NetVault6/util directory. The Trigger name is a character
string, which may be up to the maximum length allowed by your system.

NOTE: When a Triggered job is submitted, it is NOT added to the scheduled


jobs, but only saved (same effect as using the Save button). You may view
all of the triggered jobs in the Jobs tab of the NetVault Jobs window. See
Using the Jobs Tab (page 245).

For information on how to use the nvtrigger command to start a Triggered Job,
please refer to Using Schedule - Triggered (page 237).
CHAPTER 13

Job Management
Managing Jobs - 241
n Job Management Tabs - 241
n Using The Status Tab - 242
n Using the Jobs Tab - 245
n Using the History Tab - 247
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 241

Managing Jobs
Each time you start a job, NetVault starts the Job Manager which oversees and coordinates
the job. The Job Manager runs on the NetVault server, and monitors plugins and device
managers on other machines, as necessary, to complete a task.
The NetVault Jobs window displays information about all the jobs submitted by the selected
NetVault Server: completed, running and scheduled.
The NetVault Jobs window is shown in the following figure:

Job Management Tabs


Information available in each of the tabs in the Jobs Management window is
described in the following table:
Window Tab Provides Information about:
Status Jobs controlled by the NetVault server. Running and sched-
uled jobs can also be controlled in this tab.
Jobs All jobs created by the NetVault server. Jobs listed here are
not necessarily active; jobs created and saved (but not submit-
ted) in the Backup or Restore windows appear only in this
area.
242 Chapter 13
Job Management

Window Tab Provides Information about:


History The chronological list of all jobs run and controlled by the
NetVault server (on any NetVault client)

Using The Status Tab


The Status tab displays a list of all scheduled, running and recent jobs. Depending
on the current job status, jobs can be viewed, monitored, edited or aborted in the
Status tab.

Job Status Identification


Jobs are displayed in different colors, depending on their status:
Icon Indicates:
Cyan Blue Jobs scheduled, but not yet running.
Yellow Jobs currently running.
White Jobs completed (not necessarily successfully).
Dark Blue Selected Job (right mouse button for options).
The colors can be changed in the NetVault Configurator, GUI tab. For more
information about using the NetVault Configurator, see Understanding the NetVault
Configurator Dialog Box (page 32).

Log Entry Headings


Each log entry contains information under the following headings:
Heading Description:
Time Shows when the job was/is scheduled to run, at the time it was
submitted.
Job Title The name of the job as entered in the field in the NetVault
Backup or NetVault Restore window when the job was submit-
ted.
Id The job identification number assigned to the job when it was
first submitted. If the same job is submitted again, this number
will be the same, but the Instance number will be incremented.
Instance A number representing the number of times that this particular
job has been submitted. The first time a new job is submitted,
the number is always 1, the second time it is 2, etc. (even if
you have used View/Edit Job to modify the job in between
submissions, provided you do not change the job title).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 243

Heading Description:
Phase When the NetVault Backup Advanced Option, Duplicate
option is turned on, the duplicate job is allocated the same Job
ID and Job Title as the backup job, but the Phase for the dupli-
cate job will read 2 (so that the duplicate can be identified). In
all other cases, the Phase of jobs will read 1.
Status The current condition of the job (e.g. Scheduled, On Hold,
Running, Backup Completed, etc.). For more information on
the job, right-click it and choose the Monitor Job and/or View
Log commands.

Status Pop-up Menu Commands


Commands in the Status tab vary, depending on the type of job: Scheduled,
Running and Completed.
Scheduled Job Commands
Scheduled jobs appear in the Jobs Management window as shown in the following
figure:

The commands available on the right-click popup menu are:


Choose this
To do this:
command:
Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window.
This allows all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to
a new job. You may also double-click the log entry to perform
the same function.
Delete Delete the job schedule. Note that the job itself is not deleted
Schedule and continues to appear in the Jobs area. If necessary you can
load the job into the appropriate backup or restore window and
re-submit it later.
244 Chapter 13
Job Management

Choose this
To do this:
command:
Hold Put a temporary hold on the scheduled job. After selection, this
menu item changes to Resume which may be selected to re-
activate the job as scheduled.
Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to
the job queue to run it as soon as possible.

Running Job Commands


Running jobs appear in the Jobs Management window as shown in the following
figure:

The commands available on the right-click pop-up menu are:


Choose this
To do this:
command:
Monitor Job Open the Job Monitor window for the selected job. This pro-
vides both Job Information and Data Transfer information as
the job progresses. You may also double-click the log entry to
perform the same function.
View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-
play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log
entries).
Abort Job Abort a running job. After selection, an Aborting Job dialog box
opens. The job Status is shown as Aborted by user.
Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window to
allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new
job.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 245

Completed Job Commands


Completed jobs appear in the Jobs Management window as shown in the following
figure:

The commands available on the right-click pop-up menu are:


Choose this
To do this:
command:
View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-
play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log
entries).
Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window to
allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new
job.
Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to
the job queue to run it as soon as possible.

Using the Jobs Tab


The Jobs tab displays a list of all jobs in the NetVault database. The jobs do not
have to be currently active; for example, you can create a series of backup jobs in
the NetVault Backup window, saving each job with a different name, without
submitting them. When you want to submit the job, load it into the Backup window
and click the Submit button.
246 Chapter 13
Job Management

The Jobs tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Jobs Pop-up Menu Commands


Right-clicking on an entry opens a menu with the following options:
Choose this
To do this:
command:
View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-
play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log
entries).
Delete Delete the selected job on confirmation. The job will either be
deleted, or a dialog box opens informing you that the Job is
Active. Active jobs (i.e. jobs shown in the Status list as either
scheduled or running) cannot be deleted. If you want to delete
the job, Abort any instances of the running job first.
Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window to
allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new
job.
Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to
the job queue to run it as soon as possible.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 247

Using the History Tab


The History tab displays a list of all jobs which have been run. The Status column
shows whether or not they have completed (Backup or Restore), or have been
aborted by the user.
The History tab is shown in the following figure:

History Pop-up Menu Commands


When you select an entry in the History log, right-click and choose View Log, the
NetVault Logs window opens. Choose View>Set Filters to display the required
level of information (e.g. All to show all log entries
248 Chapter 13
Job Management

If you want to apply filters to the logs, choose View>Set Filters. When the Filter
Options dialog box opens, select the options (e.g. All to show all log entries) that you
want to apply, then click OK.

Select All to show


all log entries
CHAPTER 14

Using Logs
Using Logs - 251
The Logs Window - 251
n Logs Window Buttons - 252
n Using the Logs Window - 252
n Viewing Extended Logs - 254
n More Info - Job Messages - 255
n More Info - Warnings - 256
n More Info - Errors - 257
n Filtering Logs - 258
n Using the Filter Options Dialog Box - 259
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 251

Using Logs
The NetVault server has a logging service that is used to centralize all the logs in a NetVault
domain. This means that logs from the server and the clients are gathered into one central
location. To ensure that logging can continue even when the system is low on disk space,
the logging manager pre-allocates disk space.
Operational logging for processes controlled by the selected NetVault server are displayed
in the NetVault Logs window. A specific job can be easily identified, along with the
processes that occur during it. Jobs can be viewed as they progress.

The Logs Window


The NetVault Logs window is opened by clicking the Logs button on the command toolbars,
or by choosing the Operations Log command.
The NetVault Logs window appears as shown in the following figure:

Each log message is preceded with a color-coded dot signifying its level of importance. Logs
can be filtered to display the required level of detail (either higher or lower than the default
view).
252 Chapter 14
Using Logs

Logs Window Buttons


There are two buttons at the top of the screen:
Click this
To do this:
button:
Open the Filter Options dialog box (see Using the Filter
Options Dialog Box (page 259)) where you can set the
Set Filters required level of detail to be displayed in the logs screen.
Dump the logs to a file, in either ASCII text or binary format.
The binary format file can be reloaded into a NetVault Logs
Dump Log window and re-examined at a later date (enabling all the filter-
to File ing functions to be used); it can be used by NetVault Technical
Support (page 6) should there be a problem that needs investi-
gating.

Using the Logs Window


The display area shows the filtered logs in chronological order. For more information,
see Filtering Logs (page 258).

Command Menus
The screen has menus for:
Choose this
Menu To do this:
command:
File Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box
where you can select the desired
printer and specify its properties.
Print Open the Print dialog box where you
can choose the desired printer and
properties before printing.
Close Close the window.
View Set Filters Open the Filter Options dialog box to
set the level of detail you want to dis-
play.
Options Dump Log to File Save the current logs so they may be
archived and then the active logs
purged.
Select Logs Source Select the logs source to be displayed
in the NetVault Logs window.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 253

Choose this
Menu To do this:
command:
Purge Logs Purge (delete) logs back to a specified
date from the system. Should only be
used if the logs have been dumped to
a binary file and archived for possible
future reference.
Help Current Topic Display help on the current topic.
Help Contents Open the help system.

The Logs Display Area


The NetVault Logs window displays log entries for processes controlled by the
selected server. Each log message is preceded with a color-coded dot, which
signifies the message's level of importance:
Display Dots Description:
Background logs provide background information about the
NetVault System and NetVault functions.
Green
Information logs provide general details about a current or
completed NetVault function, this includes details on Sched-
Blue ule, Media and the System. For example, the Information Logs
inform you when a device is online and has media available.
Job Message logs provide details about a current or com-
pleted NetVault job. These logs inform you that a job has
Purple started and completed. They also detail the procedures that
have been carried out by the device and its media.
Warning logs provide information about incidents that may
interfere with a scheduled NetVault function, and could require
Yellow some operator intervention.
Error logs contain important information about problems that
may have caused a NetVault function to fail.
Red
Severe Error logs contain the most serious information about
critical problems that have lead a NetVault function to fail.
Red
254 Chapter 14
Using Logs

The log dots will sometimes contain an exclamation mark. By double-clicking the
exclamation mark additional information is displayed in a dialog box.
Double-click
To display:
this dot:
A Transfer Information dialog box for the job. See More Info -
Job Messages (page 255).
Purple
A View Log Context dialog box for the warning. See More Info
- Warnings (page 256).
Yellow
A View Log Context dialog box for the error will appear. See
More Info - Errors (page 257).
Red
When viewing the NetVault Logs window, you only want to see a specific type of log,
unnecessary logs can be removed by clicking the Log Filter button.

Viewing Extended Logs


Extended log information is displayed in a dialog box when a dot with an exclamation
mark is double-clicked, as illustrated in the following figures:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 255

More Info - Job Messages


Double-click a Job Message with an exclamation mark for Transfer Information.
256 Chapter 14
Using Logs

More Info - Warnings


Double-click a Warning with an exclamation mark to View Log Context.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 257

More Info - Errors


Double-click an Error Message with an exclamation mark to View Log Context.
258 Chapter 14
Using Logs

Filtering Logs
To see all of the log entries for a job:
1. Open the NetVault Logs window.

2. Click the Filter button to open the Filter Options dialog box.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 259

3. Change Warning Levels to All, and click OK - all log entries are listed in the
NetVault Logs window, shown in the following figure:

Using the Filter Options Dialog Box


The Filter Options dialog box provides different methods of filtering the logs in
separate areas.
The Filter Options dialog box appears as shown in the following figure:
260 Chapter 14
Using Logs

TIP: The quickest way of viewing a log for a particular job is to right-click it in
the NetVault Jobs window and choose View Log; that way the NetVault
Logs window is already filtered to show information for the selected job only.
For more information, see Using the Jobs Tab (page 245).

The following information provides an overview of the filter options available:


n From: Select either the First Event option button or the Specify Time option
button for a particular date and time.
n To: Select either the Last Event option button, or the Specify Time option
button for a particular date and time.
n Warning Levels: The Warning Levels determine the level of detail displayed
with All for maximum detail, and Severe Errors Only for minimum detail. Job
Messages is the default setting.
n Classes: By default all Classes of log are selected.
By clicking the title of a Class, the log messages belonging to that Class can be
prevented from appearing. The same procedure applies if the logs are not
selected and you wish to view them.
Each Class contains specific log information, detailed in the table below:
Class Description
System Messages relating to the Operating System
Schedule Messages relating to when the backup or restore occurs.
Jobs Messages relating to information produced for a specific job.
Media Messages relating to the media.
Devices Messages relating to the device(s).
Database Messages relating to the NetVault database entries.
Data Plugins Messages relating to the data plugin being used.
GUI Messages relating to the Graphical User Interface.
n Clients: By default, NetVault selects all the NetVault clients referenced in the
log files. All the log information for these clients is displayed in the NetVault
Logs window. If you do not require logs about all the clients, unwanted client
logs can be filtered out by clearing the specific Client box.
If just one client is selected, only the logs relating to this client are available for
viewing. If another client is selected, the logs of both these clients are
displayed. This process continues until all the clients are selected; however, if
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 261

no clients are selected, the log information relating to any clients will be
visible.
n Jobs: If the Filter On Job check box is selected, only the logs relating to the
Job ID specified are displayed. If the Filter On Job check box is cleared, the
logs for all jobs are shown, as moderated by other filter options.
n Text: If the Filter on Text check box is selected, and a text string is entered in
the field, only log entries containing that text (case insensitive) in the Log
Messages field are displayed. If the Filter on Text check box is, the jobs
containing any Log Message text will be shown, as moderated by other filter
options.
CHAPTER 15

Using Policy (Set) Templates


What are Policy (Set) Templates? - 265
Types of Policy Sets - 265
n Backup and Restore Job Sets - 265
n Backup Job Sets - 265
n Restore Job Sets - 266
n Standard Policy (Set) Operations - 266
n Saving a Set using the Save As button - 267
n Loading a Set using the Load button - 268
n Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box - 268
n Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded) - 269
n Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (Set Loaded) - 269
n Guidelines for using Schedule Sets - 270
Using Policy Management - 270
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 265

What are Policy (Set) Templates?


NetVault uses Policy (Set) facilities to save Templates for frequently used selections. A
Policy (Set) is a collection of options defined for a job, or portion of a job, that you save to be
re-used later.
A selection Set can be saved and re-used in many different backup or restore jobs, so that if
the selection needs to be modified it can be done in one place and all jobs using the set will
automatically be updated.
The Set facilities are similar in action to a book style or template file used with a word
processor or DTP application for book production; a style can be changed in one place and
all the chapters of the book are automatically updated (rather than have to update each
chapter individually).

Types of Policy Sets


The following sets are available:

Backup and Restore Job Sets


Set Description:
Schedule Set Save the date and time that the job is to run, and
(date/time selection) whether or not it is to be repeating.

Backup Job Sets


Set Description:
Backup Selection Set Save a specific data selection.
(data selection)
Backup Target Set Save specific Backup Targets.
(device, media and general
options)
Backup Advanced Save specific Advanced Options settings.
Options Set
(compression, pre & post
script options)
266 Chapter 15
Using Policy (Set) Templates

Restore Job Sets


Set Description:
Restore Selection Set Save a specific data selection.
(data selection)
Restore Advanced Save specific Advanced Options settings.
Options Set
(compression, scripts selec-
tion)

Standard Policy (Set) Operations


All Backup and Restore Sets use Standard Set (Policy) Control Functions. The
following example shows the Schedule Set, common to both the Backup and
Restore windows. The operations are the same for all policy sets.

Set Controls and Functions


Set Control Description:
Displays the name of the currently loaded set (if any). You
cannot type directly in this field.
Loads a previously saved set.

Saves the current settings as a new set.

Deletes the currently loaded set. This button is greyed


when no set is loaded or when Modify is not selected.
Allows the currently loaded set to be modified or copied.
Once selected for modify, you cannot clear the modify
selection; if you change your mind, load the set again to
restore the original settings.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 267

Saving a Set using the Save As button


1. In the appropriate window and tab (in this example, the Schedule tab of the
NetVault Backup window), select the options required for the set and then click
Save As.

2. Enter a meaningful name for the set, for instance Every 14th & last of Month, in
the Save Schedule Set dialog box:

3. Click OK to save it, or Cancel to abort the operation.


268 Chapter 15
Using Policy (Set) Templates

Loading a Set using the Load button


1. In the appropriate window and tab (in this example, the Schedule tab of the
NetVault Backup window), click Load.
2. Select the set you want to load (in this example, the Weekdays at 1900 set).

3. Click OK to load this set.

Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box


1. With a set loaded (in this example, Weekdays at 1900), select the Modify check
box.
A Warning dialog box opens, displaying the following message:

n Modify Selected: The loaded set (in this example, Weekdays at 1900) may
now be modified and the Modify button is available. Change the selections as
required. All settings will be saved when you Submit this job, or click the Save
As button.
n Copy Selected: The previously loaded set (in this example, Weekdays at
1900) has now been copied - NO SET IS CURRENTLY LOADED. Change the
selections as required. All settings will be saved when you Submit this job and
no set will be defined. Click Save As to save the selections under a new set
name.
n Cancel: To abort the loading of the set, click Cancel or close the message
dialog box.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 269

Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded)


Deleting a set is made deliberately difficult to prevent accidental erasure.
1. In the appropriate window and tab (in this example, the Schedule tab of the
NetVault Backup window), click Load to load the set to delete.
2. Select the set you want to load for deletion (in this example, the Weekdays at
1900 set).

The set will be loaded.


3. With the set loaded for deletion, select the Modify check box. The Delete
button is now available.
A Warning message appears, offering you the options to Modify the loaded set,
Copy it, or Cancel the operation, which is the same as that of the Modify/Copy
a Set Using the Modify Check Box (page 268).
n Click Modify to allow the set to be deleted.
n Click Delete to delete the set upon confirmation:

4. Click Yes to delete the set, or No to cancel deletion.

Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (Set Loaded)


This procedure is the same as Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set
Loaded) (page 269), unless you have already selected the Modify check box, and
then clicked the Modify button.
270 Chapter 15
Using Policy (Set) Templates

Guidelines for using Schedule Sets


When a backup or restore is to be regularly performed using a specific Schedule
(Immediate, Once, Repeating, Triggered), it is recommended that you save the
selection set with a suitably descriptive name that is easy to recognize. This allows
you to quickly re-load the selection for use in different backup or restore jobs.
The following example shows the Load Schedule Set dialog box:

Important information to remember:


n The most important aspects of the schedule selection are named.
n The schedule can be any combination of Immediate, Once, Repeating,
Triggered.
n It is not practical to identify all of the schedule selections made from the set
name. If you are not sure if you have loaded the correct settings, check them
carefully before submitting or saving the backup.
n The wording At... on ... has been used for a Once schedule.
n The wording Every... has been used for a Repeating schedule.
n The wording Triggered by... has been used for a Triggered schedule and
where the trigger string is more than one word it has been put in double quotes
("...").

Using Policy Management


Use the Policy Management window to control server selections, scheduling, and target
device options for backup jobs. Although you can define and store policy sets for restore
jobs, they are not as frequently accessed and therefore are not displayed in the Policy
Management window. You’ll notice that the Policy Management window is similar to the
NetVault Backup and Restore windows. Open the Policy Management window by choosing
the Administration Policy Management command in the main NetVault GUI.
CHAPTER 16

Using Advanced Features


What are Advanced Features? - 273
Using the Advanced Options Tab - 273
n Backup Life (Backup only) - 274
n Compression (Backup and Restore) - 274
n Verify after Backup (Backup only) - 275
n Duplication (Backup only) - 275
n NetVault Jobs, Pre & Post Scripts Execution Logic - 280
Working with Firewalls - 288
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 273

What are Advanced Features?


Advanced options provide control over such features as the life of a backup, compression of
files, data verification after backup, duplication and pre and post scripts.
Both the NetVault Backup and NetVault Restore windows have an Advanced Options tab.
This chapter describes the use of these facilities and the Trigger function on the Schedule
tab.

Using the Advanced Options Tab


The Advanced Options tab on both the Backup and Restore windows appears as shown in
the following figure:

Options available on the Advanced Options tab are:


n Backup Life
n Compression
n Verification
n Duplication
n Pre and Post Scripts
274 Chapter 16
Using Advanced Features

Backup Life (Backup only)


The Backup Life frame provides control over exactly how long a backup will live.
When you submit a backup, you have the option to give that backup a life other than
the infinite default life.
Options available under Backup Life appear as shown in the following figure:

A backup life can be defined in the following ways:

NOTE: You can use both of the backup options at the same time. The first to
be satisfied causes the backup to be retired.

n Backup - Discard after n Full Backups: This option allows you to specify the
number of generations of backups you want to keep. A backup is defined by a
Backup Set. Once the specified number of full backups for a given Backup Set
has been exceeded, the oldest backups are discarded. See also Backup Life
(Backup only) (page 274).
n Backup - Discard after time: Allows you to specify how long to keep a backup
before it is discarded. The duration of the media's usefulness is dependent on
the specified time interval number for the selected Days, Weeks or Years
option button.
n Archive - This option is a stand-alone backup. Incremental backups can not be
based on it and its life can only be set by time, not generations (number of full
backups).

Compression (Backup and Restore)


Select the Network Compression check box when you want to reduce the
bandwidth on a network when the files are transferred. When this option is selected,
additional CPU time is required to compress the files.
A single option under Compression appears as shown in the following figure:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 275

When Network Compression is selected, the following occurs:


n Backup Compression - Data is compressed on the NetVault client
containing the backup selection before it is transmitted over the network, then
decompressed on the client with the selected device attached.
Note that when a backup is to a Distributed Device (i.e. a device connected to
a different NetVault machine to the NetVault server) it can be useful to set
Network Compression ON for a backup of any other NetVault machine
(including the NetVault server itself).
n Restore Compression - Data is compressed on the NetVault client with the
device attached before it is transmitted over the network, then decompressed
on the client to which data is being restored.
Note that when a restore is from a Distributed Device (i.e. a device connected
to a different NetVault machine to the NetVault server) it can be useful to set
Network Compression ON for a restore to any other NetVault machine
(including the NetVault server itself).

Verify after Backup (Backup only)


Select the Verify after Backup check box to confirm that a backup has completed
successfully. When a backup has completed, the data transfer is checked and a job
message is created in the NetVault Job Log stating that the 'backup job has verified
successfully'. With Verify after Backup selected, the job runs more slowly.
The Verification frame is shown in the following figure:

Duplication (Backup only)


Select the Duplicate check box to copy a backup, either immediately after the
backup has completed, or a later time. The duplication copies the backup from one
piece of media to another. You must define Policy (Sets) for the Schedule and
Target in order to use this feature.

NOTE: The Data Copy plugin is another way to duplicate backups not
associated with a backup job. See *** for more information on the Data Copy
plugin.
276 Chapter 16
Using Advanced Features

Options under Duplication appears in the following figure:

Once a backup is duplicated, NetVault treats the duplicate as another instance of the
same data. The only difference between the duplicate and the original is that the
duplicate can be given a different Backup Life from the original backup.
When the Media Manager is given a restore request for data that has been
duplicated, it will use the copy that is most convenient for the task.
Options available under Duplication:
n Migrate (Discard original backup) - With Migrate (Discard original backup)
selected, as soon as the duplicate has been created, the original backup is
discarded (i.e. future backups may overwrite it). This option is used when a
backup is to be made to the most efficient device (e.g to a hard disk as a
pseudo library, or a fast tape drive) to minimize the required 'backup window',
the backup is then migrated to a different device (e.g. a slower tape library) in
the background and the fast device freed for another operation.
n Use Originals Life - With Use Originals Life selected, the duplicate is created
with a Backup Life identical to that of for the original backup under Backup
Life.
n Discard after time - With Discard after time selected, the duplicate is created
with the new Backup Life that you select in this area. The duration of the
media's usefulness is dependent on the interval number entered in the field
and the selected Days, Weeks or Years option button.
n Using Schedule Set - To set the time for the duplicate, select the relevant
schedule from the Using Schedule Set list.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 277

If a suitable schedule is not already in this list, click the Manage button to
open the NetVault Schedule Management window, shown in the following
figure, where you can create, modify or copy a Schedule Set.

Select the desired schedule option button, and choose the appropriate
settings. See Schedule Options (page 227) for more information.
When you click OK, the schedule set shown as loaded in the screens
Schedule Set field is displayed in the Duplication Schedule Set field.
n Using Target Set: To set the target for the duplicate, select the relevant target
from the Using Target Set list.
278 Chapter 16
Using Advanced Features

If a suitable target is not already in this list, click the Manage button to open the
NetVault Target Management window, shown in the following figure, where you
may create, modify or copy a Target Set.

The window is identical to the Target tab in the Backup window. For more
information, see Using the Target Tab (page 174).
Click OK and the set shown as loaded in the screens Target Set field is
displayed in the Duplication Target Set field.

Pre and Post Scripts (Backup and Restore)


You can run a stored script prior to or after a backup or restore job.
A Pre Script is run before the NetVault job. For example, a Pre Script could be used
to close down a database prior to the start of a backup, insuring that no files are
changing as the backup is carried out.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 279

A Post Script is run after the NetVault job. It could be used to re-start any
processes closed down by the Pre Script.

Using Scripts
Scripts must be an executable file for the operating system in use (for example,
under Microsoft Windows NT you may use filename.bat, filename.exe,
filename.com, or if Perl is installed filename.pl).
Please note the following important points:
n All scripts must reside in the NetVault/scripts directory. If this directory does
not already exist, you must create it and copy your scripts into it before
attempting to use them with NetVault.
n When entering the script name, the filename and the extension exists must be
entered (for example myprescript.bat, startdb.exe).
n Do not enter absolute paths in the script name fields. You can enter paths
relative to the NetVault6/scripts directory, if you want to organize your scripts
in subdirectories, (e.g. dbscripts/startdatabase.bat).
n Be careful how you use the parameter field. Whatever is entered into the
parameter field is passed to the script via the NV_USER_ARG Environmental
Variable; this is a string up to the maximum length that your system will
support. Do not enter quotation marks or escape characters in this field.
n If using a script running under Microsoft Windows NT - Use nvexitstatus (in the
NetVault\util directory) to provide the return value from the script.

NetVault Environmental Variables


The following environmental variables are available:
n NV_HOME - The path to the root of the NetVault directory.
n NV_JOBID - The numeric job identifier assigned to the job by NetVault.
n NV_STATUS - The exit status of any previous phase of a job. This will either
be SUCCEEDED or FAILED. For example, in a Post Script to a filesystem
backup, NV_STATUS will have a value of SUCCEEDED if the backup
succeeded or FAILED if it failed. If the script is run as the first phase of a job
(i.e. as a Pre Script), then this variable has no value.
280 Chapter 16
Using Advanced Features

n NV_USER_ARG - Contains whatever value(s) were typed in the User


Parameter field when the script was entered. This is a string up to the
maximum length that your system will support.

Example Scripts
Please refer to:
n Example Scripts under Windows NT (page 280).
n Example Script under UNIX (page 284).
NetVault Jobs, Pre & Post Scripts Execution Logic
NetVault executes NetVault jobs, Pre and Post Scripts according to the following
execution logic:
Process Results
Pre Script Success Success Success Fail
NetVault Job Success Success Fail Not Run
Post Script Success Fail Success Not Run
Result Job com- Job Completes Job fails Job fails with
pletes With Post Script but post script pre script
normally Error runs and reports error
error**
** Without a post script the job will fail with a message in the NetVault Jobs window,
Status area such as Backup Failed or Failed to write segment.
With a post script, using the correct exit status reporting, the job will be shown as
Backup Failed. The post script is always run, if the job runs, so that processes
stopped with a pre script can be re-started, even if the NetVault job fails.

Example Scripts under Windows NT


A Status batch file script to net report job completion status to another machine.
@echo off
rem status.bat
rem Richard Benton 19990422
rem
rem @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
rem @ Job Phase Status Report Batchfile @
rem @ Call with Advanced Option, Post Script @
rem @ to net report job completion status @
rem @ Name: status.bat User Parameter: <NONE> @
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 281

rem @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
rem

rem @@@ Standard Reporting (for all batch jobs) @@@


echo.
echo The home directory of NetVault (NV_HOME) = %NV_HOME%
echo.
echo The NetVault Job ID (NV_JOBID) = %NV_JOBID%
echo.
echo The user argument (NV_USER_ARG) = %NV_USER_ARG%
echo.
echo Previous job phase status (NV_STATUS) = %NV_STATUS%
echo

rem @@@ Previous Job Reporting (for log) @@@


if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo YES! - The backup succeeded!
if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED echo OH NO! - The backup FAILED!

rem @@@ Main Actions (Using net reporting) @@@


rem @@@@ Edit next line for correct machine to Net report to @@@@
if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID%
completed"
if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID% FAILED"

goto end

rem Any other command batch file labels go here.

:end
echo End of Particular Batch File Actions

rem Return nonzero exit state if previous NetVault job phase failed
rem DO NOT PUT ANYTHING AFTER THE LAST LINE !!!!
rem (or job will be shown as Backup Completed, instead of Backup
Failed
rem when it is no good)
cd %NV_HOME%\util
if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED nvexitstatus 0
282 Chapter 16
Using Advanced Features

if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED nvexitstatus 1

A Trigger batch file script to trigger each new job using the NV_USER_ARG as the
Post Script parameter and ‘net report’ job completion status to another machine.
@echo off
rem trigger.bat
rem Richard Benton 19990422
rem
rem @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
rem @ Standard NT Triggered Job Batchfile @
rem @ Call with Advanced Option, Post Script @
rem @ to trigger the next job in daisy-chain @
rem @ Name: trigger.bat User Parameter: <trigger> @
rem @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
rem
rem Notes:
rem 1. Batch File must reside in NetVault6\scripts directory
rem 2. If used for triggering remote jobs, script reside on both
machines
rem 3. Should work wherever NetVault6 is installed
rem 4. Written for and tested on NT; with modifications, should work
for UNIX.
rem 5. Used successfully for daisy-chained job series.
rem 6. Uses Net remote info box reporting to indicate progress of jobs
rem 7. Must have NetVault6 services running on both machines
rem if triggering remotely.
rem 8. Set to end backup series submissions if any job fails (with
error).
rem

rem @@@ Standard Reporting (for all batch jobs) @@@


echo.
echo The home directory of NetVault (NV_HOME) = %NV_HOME%
echo.
echo The NetVault Job ID (NV_JOBID) = %NV_JOBID%
echo.
echo The user argument (NV_USER_ARG) = %NV_USER_ARG%
echo.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 283

echo Previous job phase status (NV_STATUS) = %NV_STATUS%


echo

rem @@@ Previous Job Reporting (for log) @@@


if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo YES! - Job %NV_JOBID% succeeded!
if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED echo OH NO! - Job %NV_JOBID% FAILED!

rem @@@ Main Actions @@@


if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED goto bypass
rem @@@@ Edit next line for correct machine to Net report to @@@@
if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID%
Completed OK, Triggered Job %NV_USER_ARG% being called..."
rem The following cd command is necessary, as must be in
NetVault6\util to run util commands.
if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED cd %NV_HOME%\util
if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo now in directory %NV_HOME%\util
if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo (about to run nvtrigger job)

rem @@@@ Edit next 2 lines for correct NetVault Server name @@@@
if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED nvtrigger -server bentonsvr %NV_USER_ARG%
if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo "Command was nvtrigger -server
bentonsvr %NV_USER_ARG%"

goto end

rem @@@ Trigger Arguments Reference @@@


rem Example NetVault User Arguments to be used with this batchfile
rem (these are each used to backup a separate partition on Richard
PC)
rem (T for Triggered, rich for Richard PC, X for drive letter, _Xxx
for label)
rem
rem TrichD_Apps
rem TrichE_Games
rem TrichF_Apps2
rem TrichG_Data
rem TrichH_Web
rem TrichI_Sue
284 Chapter 16
Using Advanced Features

rem TrichJ_Richard
rem TrichL_Download
rem

:bypass
echo (bypassing nvtrigger commands).
rem @@@@ Edit next line for correct machine to Net report to @@@@
if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID% FAILED,
ending series"

:end
echo End of Particular Batch File Actions

rem Return nonzero exit state if previous NetVault job phase failed
rem DO NOT PUT ANYTHING AFTER THE LAST LINE !!!!
rem (or job will be shown as Backup Completed, instead of Backup
Failed
rem when it is no good)
cd %NV_HOME%\util
if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED nvexitstatus 0
if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED nvexitstatus 1

Example Script under UNIX


A simple script to check the NetVault Environmental Variables and job exit status.

echo Check NetVault Environmental Variables Script

echo 'The home directory of NetVault (NV_HOME) = $NV_HOME

echo 'The NetVault Job ID (NV_JOBID) = $NV_JOBID

echo 'The user argument (NV_USER_ARG) = $NV_USER_ARG

echo 'Previous job phase succeeded (NV_STATUS) = $NV_STATUS

# Return nonzero exit state if previous phase failed


if [ "$NV_STATUS" = SUCCEEDED ]
then
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 285

exit 0
else
exit 1
fi

Triggering Jobs using nvtrigger


NetVault provides the ability to create backup or restore jobs which are only added
to the NetVault Server's schedule when they are triggered using the nvtrigger utility
in the NetVault6/util directory.
Triggered jobs are created using the Triggered option in the Schedule tab of either
the NetVault Backup or Restore windows. For more information on using the
Schedule tab, see Scheduling Jobs (page 227).
You can run a triggered job on any NetVault Server listed with a blue (available)
icon under the Available Servers in the NetVault Domain Management window. In
most cases, this is the local NetVault Server, but can be any NetVault Server that
can be seen under the GUI.
It is not necessary to have the NetVault GUI running to use the nvtrigger command,
even if the job to be triggered is on another machine; however, it is necessary to
have the NetVault Process Manager service running. This service can be started
and stopped from the Service tab of the NetVault Configurator. For more
information, see Using the NetVault Configurator (page 31).

nvtrigger Commands
The usage (or command syntax) for nvtrigger is:
nvtrigger [-server <servername>] <triggername>
where:
<triggername> is a string, which may be up to the maximum length
allowed by your system, as entered in the Trigger name field of the Schedule
tab on the NetVault Backup or Restore windows before the job was saved or
submitted.
and optionally (for triggering a job on remote server only):
<servername> is the NetVault server name (as listed under Available
Servers), on which the job is to be triggered.
286 Chapter 16
Using Advanced Features

Triggered Backup Job (single word trigger name)


The following example shows a single word trigger:

The above triggered backup job was created. Note the following points:
n The Trigger name entered (trigger_test1) is a single word; this enables the
trigger command to be entered without the use of double quotes (" ") which are
required when a trigger name contains spaces.
n The Job Title for the backup contains the Trigger name. This makes it easy to
identify the correct trigger when looking at the list of jobs in the Jobs tab of the
NetVault Jobs window.
n The Schedule Set has been saved for possible future use.
When the backup is either saved (or submitted) the job is ready to be scheduled. It
will only be added to the backup schedule of the NetVault server (in this example
richard) when the nvtrigger command is issued:
n Either for a job on the local NetVault server:
nvtrigger trigger_test1
or for a job on a remote NetVault server (called richard):
nvtrigger -server richard trigger_test1
n from a command prompt, script or batch file. If the command is accepted, you
should receive the response:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 287

Activating trigger trigger_test1


If you then see the response:
Failed to activate trigger
this probably means that you have made a typing error, there is a network
problem, or that the NetVault services are not running on the NetVault Server
being triggered.
If you see the response:
Failed to communicate to NetVault services
this probably means that the NetVault services are not running on the local
NetVault machine.
To create the triggered job on a remote NetVault server, you can either go to the
remote NetVault machine and do it, or add the machine to your list of Controlled
Servers, by choosing the Administration Domain Management command and
creating the job on the remote machine using your local NetVault GUI.

Triggered Backup Job (multiple word trigger name)


The following example shows a multiple word trigger:
288 Chapter 16
Using Advanced Features

The above triggered backup job was created. Note the following points:
n The Trigger name entered (trigger test 3) is three words, so it will be
necessary to use double quotes (" ") around the name when using the nvtrigger
command.
n The Job Title for the backup contains the Trigger name enclosed in quotes.
This makes it easy to identify the correct trigger when looking at the list of jobs
in the Jobs tab of the NetVault Jobs window.
n The Schedule Set has been saved for possible future use.
When the backup is either saved (or submitted) the job is ready to be scheduled. It
will only be added to the backup schedule of the NetVault server (in this example
test_srv2) when the nvtrigger command is issued:
n Either for a job on the local NetVault Server:
nvtrigger "trigger test 3"
or for a job on a remote NetVault Server (called test_srv2):
nvtrigger -server test_srv2 "trigger test 3"
n from a command prompt, script or batch file. If the command is accepted, you
should receive the response:
Activating trigger trigger test 3
If you then see the response:
Failed to activate trigger
this probably means that you have made a typing error, there is a network
problem, or that the NetVault services are not running on the NetVault Server
being triggered.
If you see the response:
Failed to communicate to NetVault services
this probably means that the NetVault services are not running on the local
NetVault machine.
To create the triggered job on a remote NetVault server, you can either go to the
remote NetVault machine and do it, or add the machine to your list of Controlled
Servers, by choosing the Administration>Domain Management command and
creating the job on the remote machine using your local NetVault GUI.

Working with Firewalls


NetVault provides the ability to identify ports through which data can be transferred across a
secured network firewall. Simply enter a comma or dash-separated list of valid port ID’s in the
Valid Ports for Devices box on the Fire Wall tab of the NetVault Configurator. The port
identification must be configured on the machines with attached devices.
APPENDIX A

Performance Tuning
What is Performance Tuning? - 291
Optimizing Drive Performance - 291
Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box - 292
n From a Selected Drive - 292
n From the Device Management Window - 292
n From the Library Configure Tab - 293
Using the Edit Drive Window - 294
n Relationship between Block Size and Shared Memory Size - 297
Gathering Statistics - 297
n Viewing the Statistics - 298
Understanding How the Data Stream is Handled - 302
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 291

What is Performance Tuning?


NetVault is a high performance backup solution. After installation and the addition of
devices, the majority of default configuration settings are automatically optimized, but
settings can be manually changed to improve performance.
Driver performance is optimized through the Edit Drive dialog box as shown:

Optimizing Drive Performance


Each Drive controlled by a NetVault server can be optimized individually, so if desired,
different settings can be used for each drive in a library.
Drive configuration can be optimized as the drive is being added (either as a Simple Drive
or as part of a Library), or it can be optimized at a later time by choosing the
Administration Device Management command. For general information, see Device and
Library Management (page 59). Configuration aspects are detailed in this section.
292 Appendix A
Performance Tuning

Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box


To optimize the drive performance, open the Edit Drive dialog box after opening the Device
Management window using one of the following methods:

From a Selected Drive


1. Navigate to and select the desired drive in the Devices tab of the Device
Management window.
2. Right-click and choose Configure from the pop-up menu as shown in the
following figure:

From the Device Management Window


1. Right-click and choose Add Standalone Drive.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 293

The Add Standalone Drive window opens, as shown in the following figure:

NOTE: This method can only be used at the time a device is being added.

2. Navigate to and select the desired drive in the Choose Drives list.
3. Right-click and choose Configure from the pop-up menu

From the Library Configure Tab


1. Select the desired library, right-click and choose Modify from the pop-up menu,
as shown in the following figure:
294 Appendix A
Performance Tuning

The Modify Library window opens.


2. Click the Configure tab.

3. Navigate to and select the desired drive.


4. Right-click and choose Configure.

NOTE: This method may be used while the library is being added.

Using the Edit Drive Window


When you first open the Edit Drive window, the Configuration tab is displayed.

WARNING: Do not change the default settings in the Configuration tab


except under the guidance of NetVault Technical Support (page 6).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 295

The Configuration tab default settings are shown in the following figure:

1. Click the Performance tab. The default settings on this tab are shown in the
following figure:

The field Amount of memory to assign to transfer buffers (Kb) is what is


often referred to a the shared memory setting. The shared memory is normally
allocated in 32Kb blocks represented in the following figure, showing how it is
shared between the two transfer functions.
296 Appendix A
Performance Tuning

Shared Memory

32K
32K
32K
32K Device
Hard NetVault Tape
32K Manager
Disk Plugin Drive
...
...
...

The default setting of 257Kb is actually 8 buffers of 32Kb (plus a byte). If your
available memory allows, NetVault Limited recommends increasing this setting
to optimize performance. It is also best to leave the Lock transfer buffer in
memory check box cleared.
Under Microsoft Windows NT, it is recommend that you change the setting to
8193Kb; under certain UNIX operating systems, the kernel memory available
may be more restricted.
2. Increase the Amount of memory to assign to transfer buffers (Kb) to a more
optimal value, as discussed.

3. Click the Statistics tab.


The two check boxes on this tab allow performance statistics to be gathered and
logged. Unless you need to gather statistics, leave both check boxes cleared.
See Gathering Statistics (page 297).
4. Click the OK button.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 297

Relationship between Block Size and Shared Memory Size


The default values for block size and shared memory size are:
Block Size 32 KB
Share Memory Size 257 KB
This relationship is based on the formula:
(Block Size x 4) + 1 = Minimum Shared Memory Size
This configuration is set up for each tape drive. If you don’t satisfy this requirement,
you may encounter problems with your system.
For example,
If you’d like to increase the block size (e.g. from 32 KB to 96 KB), you must increase
the shared memory size.
n Bad Configuration
96 KB (Block Size) with 384 KB or less of shared memory
n Good Configuration
96 KB (Block Size) with 385 KB or more of shared memory.

NOTE: Configuring total shared memory size also depends on your


operating system. Always use caution when setting block size and shared
memory size on your system.

Gathering Statistics
NetVault provides the ability to gather statistics for each drive via the Statistics tab in
the Edit Drive window.
To gather statistics for a drive:
1. Open the Edit Drive window for the drive to be monitored using the instructions
in Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box (page 292).
2. Click the Statistics tab.
298 Appendix A
Performance Tuning

3. Select both check boxes and click the OK button.

The statistics gathered are represented by the following figure:

NetVault data channel


Device Tape
Plugin

Data channel statistics

- Data channel send statistics Device transfer statistics

- Plugin data transfer statistics (Device side)

Viewing the Statistics


When either of the Gather Statistics options is selected and a NetVault backup is
run, you can view the statistics by following these steps:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 299

1. Choose the Operations Logs command to open the NetVault Logs window,
shown in the following figure:

2. Click the Filter Options button on the window or choose the View Set Filters
command to open the Filter Options dialog box.
3. Select the Warning Level - All option button and the extended logging will be
shown as Background log items.
Contact Technical Support (page 6) if you need help interpreting your statistics.
The following example shows the statistics entries as Background, with green
exclamation mark icons. Double-click an extended log icon to see the
information gathered.
300 Appendix A
Performance Tuning

The Data channel statistics


(Device side) show that the
device was only blocked from
receiving data from the data
channel 5 times, for a total
time of just over 1 second.

The Device transfer


statistics show that the
transfer was blocked on the
device 8+2232+11+2+91
times (i.e.2344 times), for a
total time of about 2 1/2
minutes).
This shows that the device is
the ‘bottle neck’ in the chain.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 301

The Data channel send


statistics show that the
NetVault plugin was blocked
from sending data to the data
channel 1931 times, for a total
time of nearly 2 1/4 minutes.

The Transfer Information


shows that the transfer took 2
mins 35 secs at a transfer rate
of 483.10 Kbytes/sec.
302 Appendix A
Performance Tuning

Understanding How the Data Stream is Handled


When you use the Data Plugin (e.g. UNIX FS Plugin), it retrieves the data from disk,
then streams it into shared memory buffers. The Data Plugin requests a shared
memory buffer to send the data which it has received from disk. Once a shared
memory buffer is assigned, the data is transferred and the data plugin gets more
data from the disk, then requests another shared memory buffer, and so on.
Next, data is transferred from Shared Memory to the Device Manager. This is a
process level transfer of data so you would not expect blocking here. Once the data
transfer is complete, the Device Manager transfers the data to the tape drive via the
SCSI interface.
The tape drive uses its own memory buffers. It is important to have the data being
transferred at this point as fast as possible to keep the tape device streaming and
therefore get optimum performance.
The Data channel statistics and the Device transfer statistics dialog boxes show the
data transfer statistics between the Shared Memory and the Device Manager.
"Times requested buffer" shows the number of times the Device Manager requested
data from the Shared Memory buffers. In the example you can see that it requested
buffers 2350 times and was blocked 5 of those times. In other words, the data was
only delayed being transferred to the drive 5 out of 2350 times. The total time taken
by the blocks was 1151 milli-seconds.
You can see that 2344 blocks of data were transferred and the total time waiting for
the tape device (Blocked on device) was 154762 milliseconds (or around 2.5
minutes). This could indicate that the tape drive is at optimum performance but is not
able to transfer to tape quickly enough to keep up with the stream of data.
The Data channel statistics and the Transfer dialog boxes show the send statistics
and transfer information. This represents the data transfer between the Data Plugin
and the Shared Memory. In the example you can see that the majority of the buffer
requests were blocked. This indicates that the data from the plugin could not get
shared memory buffers frequently. This would indicate that the shared memory
buffers are too small. The data is coming off the disk at a good rate, but the Shared
Memory is not being emptied quickly enough by the Device Manager. This either
means that the shared memory buffer sizes are too small or the tape device/SCSI
bus does not meet design specifications. If you see that the tape drive is having
trouble keeping up with the data stream, you can assume that this is why there are
so many blocks.
APPENDIX B

Troubleshooting
Getting Help - 305
Dumping Log Files - 305
Producing Trace Files - 306
Running the NetVault Configurator - 306
n NetVault for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 - 306
n NetVault for UNIX - 306
Help with Common Problems - 307
n Waiting for Media - 307
n Checking Media Request, Media Status and Job Log - 307
n Block Sizes and Shared Memory Configuration - 308
n Tips on Backing Up Sybase - 308
n Using CPIO to Retrieve Files from a NetVault Tape - 309
n Informix Configurations - 311
n Missing Icons in the NetVault GUI - 311
n Multiple Network Interface Cards (NIC) and communication problems - 311
n Overheads in writing to tape - 312
n Oracle backup fails with "Can't open XXXX" message - 312
n Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients - 313
n Why does NetVault not allow you to backup the proc directory? - 314
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 305

Getting Help
BakBone Technical Support can provide you with the assistance you need if you are having
problems with your NetVault software. For details, please refer to our web site:
http://www.bakbone.com
Technical Support may need copies of your (binary) log files and special debugging trace
files to get the information they need to help you. This appendix contains instructions on how
to get that information.

Dumping Log Files


The binary format file can be reloaded into a NetVault Logs window and re-examined at a
later date (enabling all the filtering functions to be used); it can then be used by BakBone
Technical Support should there be a problem that needs investigating. Binary log dumps are
always the preferred format.
Refer to Using Logs (page 249) for information on the NetVault Log window facilities.
To dump binary log files, follow these steps:
1. From the NetVault GUI, click the Logs button to open the NetVault Log window.
2. Click the Filter Options button to open the Filter Options dialog box.
3. Set the Warning Level to All.
This is important since only the content of the dump is moderated by any log
filtering applied (i.e. the dump is the same as can be viewed in the NetVault
Logs window). In general it is best to dump all of the contents - filtering can
always be used to view only part of a log re-loaded into the window.
4. Click the Dump Log Information to File button or choose Options Dump Log
to File to open the Dump Log Entries to File dialog box, with Binary Format
selected as the default.

5. Enter a suitable filename (without an extension) in the Dump Log File Name
box and click OK.
306 Appendix B
Troubleshooting

A NetVault - Information dialog box should confirm that the log dump has been
written correctly:

6. Click the OK button to acknowledge it.


The log should have been written in the NetVault6/logs/dumps/binary (or
NetVault6\logs\dumps\binary) directory, with the specified filename.

Producing Trace Files


Debugging (producing trace files) should only be turned on under the direction of BakBone
Technical Support. If you are requested to produce trace files, you need to:
n Open the NetVault Configurator and turn debugging ON. See Turning on debugging
(page 37).
n Repeat the activity that was causing problems, so that full debugging trace files for it are
produced.
n Open the NetVault Configurator and turn debugging OFF. See Turning off debugging
(page 37).
n Upload the trace files to the BakBone ftp site.
To reduce transfer time, we recommend that the complete trace sub-directory be zipped
(or compressed) before being uploaded to the NetVault Limited ftp site (currently ftp
www.bakbone.com). We do not recommend that you send the trace files by e-mail, as
they could overload Internet e-mail systems and fail to arrive. Contact Technical Support
(page 6) for more information.

Running the NetVault Configurator


To run the NetVault Configurator:

NetVault for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0


Choose Start>Programs>NetVault >NetVault Configurator.

NetVault for UNIX


Change to the NetVault6/bin directory and issue the command:
./nvconfigurator
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 307

Help with Common Problems


Some of the most common problems you may encounter are explained in this section.

Waiting for Media


When a NetVault Job is running, it is normal for NetVault to have to wait for a period
for the media to be made ready for writing or reading. During this period, the Status
of the job in the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window is shown as Waiting for
Media.
Under certain circumstances the job will remain in this condition, requiring operator
intervention to resolve the problem. There are a number reasons why this might
occur, including:
n A backup job has been targeted to a particular device and/or item of media
and either the device or media are offline, or otherwise unavailable. This is
when the job is using option on the Target tab of the NetVault Backup window.
n A required media for a restore job is currently offline.
n There is no suitable device/media combination available to continue with the
job. This may happen if you do not have media with sufficient space available
to complete the backup. For example, the first part of the job may run and fill
up a tape in a library, but there is no suitable tape to continue the next phase
of the backup.
n You have submitted a backup with the default Target Media option of Any not
in a group, but all available tapes are allocated to groups so they will not be
used (even if they contain no backups).
n A problem has occurred with the device or media which become defective, as
you are using them. Note that if media is found to be defective, it is normally
marked Bad by NetVault and the media is not used for a backup.

Checking Media Request, Media Status and Job Log


The easiest way to see what is wrong is to view the Media Request information
provided in the Device Management window. For more information, see The Media
Requests Tab (page 72).
If you think that the media in the drive may have a problem, select the drive, right-
click and choose Media Status to check its condition.
You can also select the job in the Status area of the NetVault Jobs window, right-
click and choose View Log to see any error or warning messages. For more
information, see Job Management (page 239).
308 Appendix B
Troubleshooting

Block Sizes and Shared Memory Configuration


NetVault is configured to use 32k blocks of data and 257k of shared memory per
drive. If you think of shared memory as many small buckets of memory where blocks
of data are stored, then it follows that by using a 32k block size many blocks of data
can be stored in 257k of shared memory.
If the block size is increased to 128k, but the shared memory remains the same, then
the largest number of blocks that can be stored in the shared memory is two, with
very little space remaining.
This limitation impacts performance, since you are no longer using memory for
buffering data.
As a rough guide to configuration of shared memory and block size's, use the
following calculation to estimate the minimum amount of shared memory per drive:
Block Size X 4 = Shared memory size.
If your block size is set to 32k, then use this calculation:
32 X 4 = 128k which sets up the drives to use 128k shared memory.
If your block size is 128k, then use this calculation.
128 X 4 = 512k which sets up the shared memory to use 512k shared memory.
Remember that this calculation is the absolute minimum you would want to use. It is
always better to add at least a few k on to of these amounts, so 128k would become
130k and 512k would become 520k

Tips on Backing Up Sybase


The following information is valuable to prevent problems in backing up Sybase:
1. Install the Sybase plugin via the Client Management window, there will be an
install software method off the pop-up menu from the selected client.
2. Copy the libsybhook.so file from the NetVault lib directory to the Sybase lib
directory.
3. In the /etc/rc2.d/S99NetVault6 file add the lines before NetVault is started
SYBASE=<path to sybase XI>
export SYBASE
e.g.
'start')
findnv6home
SYBASE=<path to sybase XI>
export SYBASE
$NVHOME/bin/nvpmgr
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 309

exit 0
4. In the NetVault configurator (nvconfigurator) go to the Plugin Options tab, then
the Sybase options tab. Ensure the path to Sybase is correct, the default is /opt/
sybase/XI.

Using CPIO to Retrieve Files from a NetVault Tape


To retrieve files from a NetVault tape using CPIO (not NetVault), follow these steps:
1. Rewind the tape.
Check in NetVault for the name of the device driver of the tape device you want
to use. The device driver MUST be a non-rewinding device.
IMPORTANT: Make sure you do NOT have NetVault, or any other process that
uses the tape drive, running while you perform the commands; mt will fail
because NetVault locks the device.
Enter the following command:
mt -f <device_name> rewind
e.g. mt -f /dev/rmt/c1t0d0s0nn rewind
When this is complete, move the tape to the correct position.
2. Position the tape at the correct point on the tape.
To correctly position the tape, you need to understand how NetVault has
structured a CPIO tape, shown in the following figure:

NetVault Backup Index Backup Index Backup


Header Job 1 Job 2 Job 3

Note: The lines between the files are filemarks on the tape.
If you want to CPIO the first backup job from the tape then you will need to
position the tape past the NetVault Header to the first filemark that denotes the
beginning of the first backup job, using these steps:
Issue the following command:
mt -f <device_name> fsf X
where X denotes the number of file marks you want to move to.
e.g., to move to the start of Backup Job 2, the command would be
mt -f <device_name> fsf 3
Important: Only use NON-REWINDING device drivers. If you use a rewinding
device driver, after each time the tape is repositioned it will rewind. No matter
310 Appendix B
Troubleshooting

how many file marks you move you will always end up at the beginning of the
tape.
3. Use CPIO to un-archive the files onto your hard disk.
Issue the following command to un-archive the data from the tape onto your hard
disk into the original directory the files were backed up from:
cpio -icvdumB <device_name>
For example, if the files were backup up from /home/elliott, then the files will be
restored to /home/elliott even if you ran CPIO from /usr.
Make sure you have enough disk space to complete this activity. If you want to
view the archive before you un-archive onto your hard disk, issue the following
command:
cpio -tab <device_name>
This will list the archive as if you listed a directory contents with the ls -I
command.
To move the archive from tape onto your hard disk before un-archiving, issue the
following command:
dd if=<device_name> of=/<location to place file/name of the
file> bs=xxk
where xxk is the device block size.
e.g., dd if=/dev/rmt/c120t5d0s0nn of=/home/elliott/
file.cpio bs=32k
If you check the directory into which the file was copied.
Now you need to un-archive the file by issuing the following command:
cpio -icvdumB </location of cpio file>
e.g., cpio -icvdumB </home/elliott/file.cpio
Again, this will un-archive the files into their original directory. There is no
function within CPIO that allows files to be redirected into an alternate directory.
FOR SUN SOLARIS ONLY
The command shown below will not work on Sun Solaris machines:
cpio -icvdumB <device_name>
To cpio directly from tape, use the following command:
dd if=<non rewinding tape> bs=xxk | cpio -icvdumB
where xx is the block size of the device.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 311

Informix Configurations
In the Informix onconfig file, there are 2 settings that may cause problems if not
correctly configured:
TAPEDEV /dev/null # Tape device path
LTAPEDEV /dev/null # Log tape device path
If these are set to /dev/null then this could cause Informix problems. Change the
/dev/null to NetVault, and this problem is resolved.

Missing Icons in the NetVault GUI


If, when browsing a client, there are missing icons, you may need to refresh the
cached pits, using these steps:
1. Stop the GUI on both the server and the client.
2. Navigate to the /nv6/gui/cachedpits directory.
3. Remove the directory that has the same name as the client with the missing
icons.
4. Move into the /cachedpits/icons directory
5. Remove ALL icons.
6. Restart the GUI on the client.
7. Browse the client, and all icons will be copied from the server to the client. This
may take a few seconds.

Multiple Network Interface Cards (NIC) and communication


problems
NetVault6 allows you to define which NIC you want NetVault6 to use. This can be
useful if you are having problems with communications between a NetVault6 server
and a NetVault6 client.
To specify which NIC you want to use, follow these steps:
1. Start the NetVault configurator on the machine with the multiple NIC's and click
the Network Manager tab.
2. To specify a NIC, enter the IP address the NIC is using into the preferred
network address and NetVault will only use that NIC to broadcast on.
If there are NIC's that are may be connected to the internet or to parts of the
network you do not want NetVault to broadcast on, then enter the IP addresses
of the NIC's you want to bar.
If there are multiple addressees, then enter the addresses separated by a
comma (,) for example, 192.168.1.1,192.168.1.2
312 Appendix B
Troubleshooting

In a environment that has more than 2 networks, this can be used to prefer some
networks over others, as described in the following example:
A site has 3 networks:
Network A is the working network.
Network B is a the backup network
Network C is a private network that should not be used for backups at all.
Most machines are connected to network A, but some are only connected to Network
B. No machines are only connected to network C. A few machines are connected to
both network A & B
In this case, we can set up Network B as the preferred network, and network C as a
barred network.
This will have the following effect:
Machines that are connected to both A & B will use B.
Machines that are connected to A only will be able to backup as network A is
not barred.
Machines that are connected to B will only backup over network B, completely
ignoring network A.
This means that only machines that have to be backed up over Network A will, all
other machines if possible will backup over Network B. This reduces traffic on the
working network, and ensures that you will get the best usage out of your backup
network.

Overheads in writing to tape


When backing up to tape, there is an overhead that makes the backup appear to
backup a larger amount of data than is reported by the OS.
The overheads for writing to tape are:
n CPIO (Unix) 110 byte overhead per file
n MTF (Windows NT) Minimum of 2K overhead per file
Data stored on tape will ALWAYS be bigger than that on disk. This is because there
is an overhead with tape formats for storing data.
This means that if you are doing lots of small files - less that 1k, your backups will
easily be twice as big. If you have 1000 empty files they will actually require 2Mb of
tape space when using MTF.

Oracle backup fails with "Can't open XXXX" message


If an Oracle backup fails with an error Can't open XXX file or directory, it may
indicate a permissions problem.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 313

The following directories both need read/write access rights to both the netvault/root
user and the to oracle user:
/netvault6/config
/netvault6/tmp
During the backup, NetVault SU's from root to oracle user. Problems can occur if
the oracle user cannot write into either of the above directories.
Usually the process manager on a restart will set the correct write accesses to both
the netvault and oracle user, but there have been times when this does not work
under certain circumstances.
The resolution in this case is to chmod the above directories to 777. This will allow
ALL users read and write access.

Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault


servers and clients
If you find you can see network clients, but are getting error messages relating to
not being able to communicate with them, you must:
1. Establish whether you actually have a link between the 2 machines by pinging
each way (from client to server and from server to client).
Always use network names. If the ping fails with the network name, but works
with an IP address, then almost certainly you have not setup either DNS or
hosts. Either can be responsible for name resolution.
2. Running nslookup can also help in trying to understand why you are unable to
connect to a machine. Running nslookup on a machine will not only show the
network name and IP address of the machine you specified, but it will also tell
you the DNS server that the machine is resolving against. Use the following
commands to determine whether DNS is correctly configured;
From the NetVault server:
nslookup <clients network name including domain name>
-> Make sure the correct IP is returned
nslookup <clients IP address>
-> Make sure the correct fully qualified domain name is returned
From the NetVault Client:
nslookup <servers network name including domain name>
-> Make sure the correct IP is returned
nslookup <servers IP address>
-> Make sure the correct fully qualified domain name is returned
314 Appendix B
Troubleshooting

Once you have ascertained that you are able to ping with the network name,
check to see if you can communicate with the client.
3. If the reverse DNS is incorrect (i.e., nslookup <ip address> is returning nothing or
the wrong name), then add the server and clients name and IP address to the
hosts files on both the server and client. Most machines are set up to try name
resolution from hosts files first, then DNS. If this is the case, adding names and
IPs into the hosts file should override the DNS problem. However, this is not a
permanent fix and efforts to resolve the DNS problems should be made. This is
particularly so if you are using DHCP.
This will achieve 2 things.
n First, it will allow you to be able to back up your client.
n Second, it will prove that there is a problem with the name resolving of your
DNS server.
You will find the hosts file is the following places:
Windows NT: C:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts
Unix: /etc/hosts
The layout of the hosts file is:
<IP Address><space or tab><Name>
for example: 192.168.1.23 elliott
You can also have multiple network names (or aliases) in hosts. These will be
separated by a space.

Why does NetVault not allow you to backup the proc directory?
The /proc directory is a dynamic structure created so that the operating system
memory space can be accessed through the filesystem. It is almost completely read
only and restoring it cannot be done. It is not the original image for the kernel on disk
but the memory version of it.
APPENDIX C

Using Regular Expressions


What is a Regular Expression? - 317
Where are Regular Expressions Used? - 317
Using Regular Expressions - 317
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 317

What is a Regular Expression?


A regular expression is a shorthand for abbreviating patterns of text.

Where are Regular Expressions Used?


Regular expressions can be used in the Restore Search dialog box when looking for specific
backup savesets in the Selections frame of the NetVault Restore window.
To open the Restore Search dialog box, select a backup saveset (or any data elements
below it), right-click and choose Search from the pop-up menu. The Restore Search dialog
box appears as shown in the following figure:

Select the Regular Expression Search check box to search for all backups satisfying the
regular expression pattern entered as a Search String.
The use of these expressions is beyond the scope of this manual but this Appendix provides
some information from a Public Domain source which may be of use.

NOTE: BakBone Software assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of this


information.

Using Regular Expressions


The following is adapted from the manual for GNU grep (a general regular expression
parser), the data extractor search engine uses egrep to perform free-text searches.
A regular expression is a pattern that describes a set of strings. Regular expressions are
constructed analogously to arithmetic expressions, by using various operators to combine
smaller expressions
Grep understands two different versions of regular expression syntax: `basic' and
`extended.' In GNU grep, there is no difference in available functionality using either syntax.
In other implementations, basic regular expressions are less powerful. The following
description applies to extended regular expressions; differences for basic regular
expressions are summarized afterwards.
The fundamental building blocks are the regular expressions that match a single character.
Most characters, including all letters and digits, are regular expressions that match
318 Appendix C
Using Regular Expressions

themselves. Digits, are regular expressions that match themselves. Any meta-character with
special meaning may be quoted by preceding it with a backslash.
A list of characters enclosed by [ and ] matches any single character in that list; if the first
character of the list is the caret ^ then it matches any character not in the list.
For example, the regular expression [0123456789] matches any single digit.
A range of ASCII characters may be specified by giving the first and last characters,
separated by a hyphen. The above expression can therefore be concisely expressed as [0-
9].
Finally, certain named classes of characters are predefined. Their names are self
explanatory, and they are [:alnum:], [:alpha:], [:cntrl:], [:digit:], [:graph:], [:lower:], [:print:],
[:punct:], [:space:], [:upper:], and [:xdigit:]. For example, [[:alnum:]] means [0-9A-Za-z],
except the latter form is dependent upon the ASCII character encoding, whereas the former
is portable. (Note that the brackets in these class names are part of the symbolic names, and
must be included in addition to the brackets delimiting the bracket list.) Most metacharacters
lose their special meaning inside lists. To include a literal ] place it first in the list. Similarly, to
include a literal ^ place it anywhere but first. Finally, to include a literal - place it last.
The period . matches any single character. The symbol \w is a synonym for [[:alnum:]] and \W
is a synonym for [^[:alnum]].
The caret ^ and the dollar sign $ are metacharacters that respectively match the empty string
at the beginning and end of a line. The symbols \< and \> respectively match the empty string
at the beginning and end of a word. The symbol \b matches the empty string at the edge of a
word, and \B matches the empty string provided it's not at the edge of a word.
A regular expression matching a single character may be followed by one of several
repetition operators:
? The preceding item is optional and matched at most once.
* The preceding item will be matched zero or more times.
+ The preceding item will be matched one or more times.
{n} The preceding item is matched exactly n times.
{n,} The preceding item is matched n or more times.
{,m} The preceding item is optional and is matched at most m times.
{n,m} The preceding item is matched at least n times, but not more than m times.
Two regular expressions may be concatenated; the resulting regular expression matches any
string formed by concatenating two substrings that respectively match the concatenated
subexpressions.
Two regular expressions may be joined by the infix operator |; the resulting regular
expression matches any string matching either subexpression.
Repetition takes precedence over concatenation, which in turn takes precedence over
alternation. A whole subexpression may be enclosed in parentheses to override these
precedence rules.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 319

The backreference \n, where n is a single digit, matches the substring previously matched
by the nth parenthesized subexpression of the regular expression.
In basic regular expressions the metacharacters ?, +, {, |, (, and ) lose their special meaning;
instead use the backslashed versions \?, \+, \{, \|, \(, and \).
In egrep the metacharacter { loses its special meaning; instead use \{.
APPENDIX D

Hardware and Software Support


Platform and Operating System Support - 323
Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver - 323
n Installation from Image File - 323
n Copying the Software from the CD-ROM - 324
n Installing the Software from Image - 324
n Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver - 325
n Post-Installation - 327
n Specifying Media Changer to RS6000 - 327
n NetVault Utilities - 327
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 323

Platform and Operating System Support

NetVault Platform/OS Support

NetVault Servers NetVault Clients

Windows NT (Intel) Windows NT (Intel)


NCR (MP-RAS r03) NCR (MP-RAS r03)

SUN Solaris (SunSparc) SUN Solaris (SunSparc)

SUN Solaris (Intel) SUN Solaris (Intel)


Irix (Silicon Graphics) Irix (Silicon Graphics)

Digital UNIX (Alpha) Digital UNIX (Alpha)

Linux Linux
HP-UX (HP9000/700) HP-UX (HP9000/700)

AIX (IBM RS/6000) AIX (IBM RS/6000)

Windows 95/982

Windows 3.1x2

OS/2 (IBM)2

Novell NetWare 3 & 42

NOTE: For the most up-to-date information on platform and operating systems
supported by NetVault, go to the web site at www.netvault.co.uk.

2
File System backup and restore using Office Data Share plugin

Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver

Installation from Image File


To install the software you must:
n Copy the NetVault SCSI driver software from the distribution media to the
computer.
324 Appendix D
Hardware and Software Support

n Run an interactive program that automates the installation procedure.


Copying the Software from the CD-ROM
You first of all copy the NetVault SCSI driver installation software from the
Distribution CD-ROM to your NetVault Server as follows:
1. Log on to the computer as root.
2. Insert the distribution CD-ROM into a drive on the computer, or one shared on
the network.
3. Using your standard binary file copy/transfer procedures, copy the image file
from the root of the CD-ROM, to the /tmp directory on the computer.
You should ensure that the filename image is in lower case once transferred.

Installing the Software from Image


You install the NetVault SCSI Drivers as follows:
1. Log on to the computer as root.
2. Run the IBM smit utility, and select the following options from the menus
presented:
• Software Installation and Maintenance
• Install and Update Software
• Install/Update Selectable Software (Custom Install)
• Install/Update From All Available Software
The Install/Update From All Available Software window is displayed:

3. Enter the INPUT device /directory for software, i.e. manually type in the path:
/tmp/image
4. Click OK.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 325

Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver


The window changes as shown in the following figure:

5. Click List alongside the SOFTWARE to install line.


The Multi-select List window is displayed:
326 Appendix D
Hardware and Software Support

6. Select the NetVault Scsi Media Changer Driver and click OK (twice) on this
screen and the previous screen.
You will be asked “Are you sure?.”
7. Click OK.
The Netvault SCSI drivers will now install. Please wait. At the end of the installation
the Install/Update From All Available Software window will show the installation
output:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 327

The key part of the window show read:

8. Choose Done.
Your NetVault SCSI driver software is now installed in the /usr/lpp/netvault
directory.
9. Exit smit and continue with the Post Installation procedure.

Post-Installation
After installing the software, it is necessary to configure the media changer of an
attached library onto your system:

Specifying Media Changer to RS6000


To specify a Media Changer to the system you enter the following command:
/usr/lpp/netvault/addchm
This automatically configures the media changer on the system, e.g.
Scanning SCSI busses for unknown chm devices
Found "OVERLAND" "LXB" on scsi1 at Connection Address [3,0]
Adding LXB as a generic CHM device
mkdev -c chm -s scsi -t generic -p scsi1 -w 3,0
wa0 Available
The device in the example was added as /dev/wa0.

NetVault Utilities
The /usr/lpp/netvault directory contains a number of files which should not be
manually removed. The two executables which you may run are:
/usr/lpp/netvault/addchm
This automatically configures the media changer on the system (see previous
heading) and
/usr/lpp/netvault/remove_chm_devices
328 Appendix D
Hardware and Software Support

Use this to remove wa devices before uninstalling the NetVault SCSI drivers using
smit.
APPENDIX E

Creating Virtual Libraries


Creating Virtual Libraries - 331
n Getting Set Up to Create a Virtual Library - 331
n Generating Disk Devices - 332
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 331

Creating Virtual Libraries


In order to place backed up data on a hard drive, you must configure NetVault with a
directory structure incorporating files that represent the media to be created. The Automatic
Disk Device Generator makes creating virtual libraries a simple process.
You may want to set up this type of configuration for evaluation, disk staging or just backing
up to a hard disk.

Getting Set Up to Create a Virtual Library


Your NetVault installation CD includes a package that allows you to automatically
generate disk devices in a virtual library. To install the package on your machine:
1. Open the Client Management window by clicking the Client Management
button on the toolbar or by choosing the Administration Client Management
command.
2. Right -click the desired client and choose Install Software, as shown in the
following figure:

3. Navigate to the directory where your NetVault software was installed and find
the packages/extra-npks/ddv110g.npk file.
332 Appendix E
Creating Virtual Libraries

4. Double-click the file. The software is loaded and the following message appears:

5. Click OK to exit the dialog box.


Now you are ready to generate your disk devices.

Generating Disk Devices


Follow these steps to generate disk devices on your hard drive:
1. Open the Device Management window by clicking the Device Management
button on the command toolbar or by choosing the Administration Device
Management command.
2. Right-click the desired device and choose Add Library to open the Add Library
window, shown in the following example:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 333

3. Right-click the client in the Choose Library area and choose Create Pseudo
Library to open the Add new pseudo library dialog box, shown in the following
figure:

4. Enter the following information:


n Library location: The path to the location of the library.
n Library name: The name of the library you want to create.
n Barcode prefix: The prefix for the barcodes you want to assign. NetVault
generates a random code to help maintain the uniqueness of bar codes.
n Number of drives: Select the number of drives you want to create.
n Number of slots: Assign the number of slots in the library.
n Media capacity (MB): The size of the media in each slot.

NOTE: The media capacity you choose in the Add new pseudo library dialog
box is the size of each slot in the library. Make sure your available disk
space can accommodate these requirements.

5. Click OK to start building the library.


When the library has been created a confirming message appears, as shown in
the following figure:

6. Click OK to close the dialog.


Now you can add the library to the client by following the normal steps used to
add libraries. See Adding Libraries (page 81) for instructions.
334 Appendix E
Creating Virtual Libraries

To see that the devices you just added are available for use, open the Device
Management window, as shown in the following example:
APPENDIX F

Using the NetVault Configurator


Using the NetVault Configurator - 337
n Machine Tab - 337
n License Tab - 338
n Service Tab - 339
n Packages Tab - 340
n General Tab - 341
n Fire Wall Tab - 344
n GUI Tab - 345
n Logging Daemon Tab - 349
n Media Manager Tab - 351
n Network Manager Tab - 352
n Schedule Manager Tab - 355
n Security Tab - 357
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 337

Using the NetVault Configurator


The NetVault Configurator is a configuration tool included as part of the standard NetVault
installation, even if the NetVault GUI (Graphical User Interface) is not installed. There is no
online help system for the Configurator.
Normally, the Configurator is used to start and stop NetVault services which does not
require assistance from Technical Support. However, it is recommended that other options
be changed only with the guidance of BakBone Technical Support (page 6).
This appendix explains all the options in the NetVault Configurator.

Machine Tab
The Machine tab details information about the machine NetVault is installed on,
including the Machine ID required to get a permanent License Key after product
purchase.
The NetVault Configurator’s Machine tab is shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Machine Tab includes:


n NetVault Machine Name: The name given to the NetVault server or client
during installation, used to reference the NetVault machine while using
NetVault. This name does not have to be the same as the host name, it can be
different. Note that in naming a NetVault machine you cannot use special
characters, punctuation characters, spaces or capital letters. For instance,
338 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

server, server1 and servernumber1 are acceptable, whereas server/1, server-


1, server1! or “server1” are not.
n Machine ID: The unique machine identification generated by NetVault, in most
cases from the host name of the machine. License keys are generated from the
machine ID and are tied to it. If the machine ID is changed, a new license key
must be made.
n Network Name(s): The host name of the NetVault server. Machines can have
more than one network name also known as Aliases.
n IP Address(es): The IP address of the computer. If multiple addresses are
present all are displayed here whether they are on the same nic or on multiple
nics. This is independent of any settings in the preferred/barred configuration.
n NetVault Version: The version number of the NetVault installation.
n O.S. Version: The version of the Operating System running on this computer.
n NetVault Platform: The platform under which NetVault is operating.
License Tab
The License tab details the Server Capabilities and the Serial Numbers of Applied
Keys for the machine on which NetVault is installed. This information is the same as
that available in the Server Properties dialog box of NetVault’s Domain
Management window.
The NetVault Configurator License tab is shown in the following figure:
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 339

Information available in the License tab includes:


n Server Capabilities: Lists the maximum Number of different server
capabilities. Information displayed depends on the license installed. During an
evaluation period all capabilities are enabled. With a permanent key installed
only the purchased features are enabled and displayed here.
n Serial Numbers of Applied Keys: The serial numbers installed on this
computer. This is a list of ALL keys applied to this server/client. Keys applied
to other machines are not displayed here.

NOTE: If this is an evaluation installation, the length of the evaluation period


and the number of days left in that period are displayed. If a permanent key
is installed prior to the expiration of the evaluation period, both keys are
listed. When the evaluation period expires, that information is removed from
this display.

Service Tab
The Service tab allows you to start and stop NetVault service. After installation, or
after a system re-boot, the NetVault Process Manager is automatically started.
When upgrading to the most current NetVault release, you must start the service
manually. The Current State of NetVault is displayed in the Service tab.
When necessary, you can Start NetVault and Stop NetVault by clicking the
appropriate buttons on the Service tab. If you need assistance in stopping NetVault
services, contact BakBone Technical Support (page 6).

NOTE: When stopping NetVault, wait for at least 30 seconds after the
service shows Stopped before restarting the service to ensure that all
processes were stopped correctly.
340 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator’s Service tab is shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Service Tab includes:


n Current State: Shows if NetVault is running or stopped.
n Stop NetVault: Click this button to stop the NetVault service.
n Start NetVault: Click the button to start the NetVault service.
Packages Tab
The Packages tab is an alternative way to install or remove NetVault Application
Plugin Module software. The APM installation procedure is detailed in Installing
NetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).
The Packages tab is useful when NetVault plugin software is to be installed locally
on a NetVault client (without a NetVault interface), rather than remotely from the
NetVault server.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 341

The NetVault Configurator’s Packages tab is shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Packages Tab includes:


n Install Software: Click this button to install new software (i.e., plugins) to the
server. Note that this only installs packages on the local machine. To install a
package on another NetVault machine, use the Client Management window.
n Installed Packages: The list of packages installed on this machine, along
with the date installed and any flags associated with the package.
n Remove Software: Click this button to remove selected software from this
machine. To remove software from another machine, use the Client
Management window.

General Tab
The General Tab allows you to change the pathnames of the directories used by
NetVault, select a language and set buffer sizes.
342 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator’s General tab is shown in the following figure:

Information available on the General Tab includes:


n Generate debugging files: When enabled, a normal level of trace is
generated for all processes. A trace file is created for each process and placed
in a trace directory in the root of the NetVault directory. No additional action is
required to create normal level trace. To create higher levels of trace the
programs.cfg file must be modified to set the appropriate trace level.

NOTE: Trace generates large files very quickly, and some processes are
more verbose than others. Make sure you have sufficient space to store
trace files and leave trace turned on only as long as you need it. Some
processes may need to be restarted before doing a trace. Consult Technical
Support (page 6) for assistance with trace levels and restarting processes.

n Database Directory: The pathname of the NetVault database directory.


n Trace Directory: The pathname of the NetVault trace directory.
n Log Directory: The pathname of the NetVault log directory.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 343

n Temporary Directory: The pathname of the NetVault temporary directory.

NOTE: Make sure you have enough space allocated for these directories if
you are relocating them. For example, relocating the tmp directory to a new
location without enough space causes backup and restore jobs to fail.
NetVault requires some temp space as a working area for creating and
retrieving previous indexes. Also allocate enough space for the NetVault
database to grow if media is not being rotated.

n Language Selection: Choose the desired language to be used in NetVault.


Normally the only selection available is English, unless the installation has
been localized.
n Minimum network send buffer size (Kb): Controls the minimum size of
kernel memory NetVault can use to buffer data on network sockets. If the
minimum buffer size is increased, performance increases.
n Maximum network send buffer size (Kb): Controls the maximum size of
kernel memory NetVault can use to buffer data on network sockets. If the
maximum buffer size is decreased, the reliability of the connection may be
increased.
n Minimum network receive buffer size (Kb): Controls the size of the receive
buffer. See minimum send buffer for further explanation.
n Maximum network receive buffer size (Kb): Controls the size of the receive
buffer. See maximum send buffer for further explanation.
n Package Install System Check: When enabled, NetVault checks the
installed packages and makes sure they are for the operating system the
package requires. For instance, if you attempt to install a Solaris package on a
Windows machine a warning message appears.

Plugin Options Tab


The Plugin Options tab contains information and the unique settings for the plugins
installed on your machine.
344 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

An example of the NetVault Configurator’s Plugin Options tab is shown in the


following figure:

Because the information appearing in this tab varies by plugin, the options and
settings will be different for each installation. If you do not understand any of these
options, contact Technical Support (page 6).

Fire Wall Tab


The Fire Wall Tab allows you to identify ports through which data can be transferred
across a secured network firewall. The port identification must be configured on the
machines with attached devices.

NOTE: Make sure that the specified ports within the firewall are open and
properly configured.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 345

The NetVault Configurator’s Fire Wall Tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Fire Wall tab includes:


n Valid Ports for Devices: Enter a comma or dash-separated list of valid port
ID’s in the box.

GUI Tab
Settings in the GUI tab allow you to specific screen refresh rates, change display
colors, control messages in the Jobs window and set the number of messages
appearing in the Logs window.
The GUI tab includes an individual tab for each of the settings available, as
described below:

GUI Tab (Refresh Rates)


Settings in the Refresh Rates tab control the speed at which the screen is updated
in the GUI to reflect changes in NetVault. Small numbers increase the rate of screen
update at the expense of increased CPU load. Large refresh rates slow the screen
update but lightens the CPU load.
346 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

The Refresh Rates tab within the NetVault Configurator’s GUI tab appears as shown
in the following figure:

Information available on the Refresh Rates tab within the GUI tab includes:
n Job refresh rate in milliseconds: The rate of screen update for the Jobs
window.
n Device refresh rate in milliseconds: The rate of screen update for the Device
window.
n Job Monitor refresh rate in milliseconds: The rate of screen update for the
Job Monitor window.

GUI Tab (Colors)


Settings in the Colors tab control the color of the three states of jobs in the Jobs
window status tab.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 347

The Colors tab within the NetVault Configurator’s GUI tab appears as shown in the
following figure:

The colors red, green and blue are used in various combinations to display the
scheduled, running and completed jobs in the Jobs window. Increasing or
decreasing the RGB values changes the colors. Color intensity can be changed for
each of the following:
n Color of scheduled jobs (RGB)
n Color of running jobs (RGB)
n Color of completed jobs (RGB)

GUI Tab (Jobs)


The option available in the Jobs Tab of the NetVault Configurator GUI tab allows
you to override the default constraint of supplying a target set for duplicate media.
348 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

The Jobs tab within the NetVault Configurator’s GUI Tab appears as shown in the
following figure:

Information available on the Jobs tab within the GUI tab includes:
n Permit Duplicate Phase with no Target Set: A target set is required for
duplicate media unless this option is selected to override it. If multiple
duplication jobs claim all the drives to read the source media, there will be no
drives available for the target media. To prevent a deadlock situation when
using the same target for all your duplicates, leave this option cleared.

GUI Tab (Logging)


The Logging tab within the GUI tab allows you to control the number of log messages
stored. The number of log messages affects the speed of opening the logs window
and the disk space used to store the messages. This is especially important when
controlling a domain server over a network or a dial-up connection. Setting an
unlimited number of job messages on an NT system can use all available system
memory and render the machine unusable. Contact Technical Support (page 6) for
assistance in setting the number of log messages.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 349

The Logging tab within the NetVault Configurator’s GUI Tab appears as shown in
the following figure:

Information available on the Logging tab within the GUI tab includes:
n Maximum log messages in log window: Enter the desired number of
messages in the box or click the up and down arrows until the desired number
appears. By allowing only 1,000 log messages, the amount of used disk space
is kept to a minimum.

Logging Daemon Tab


NetVault’s logging daemon sends warning messages to the screen when the
thresholds set in the Logging Daemon tab are in danger of being exceeded.
350 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator’s Logging Daemon tab appears as shown in the following
figure:

Information available in the Logging Daemon tab includes:


n Disk Space Warning Threshold (percent full): Specifies the percentage of
space which can be used for the tmp directory of the NetVault database on
Windows NT systems only, based on the disk or partition that NetVault is
installed on. When this level is reached, NetVault logs a message to inform you
that you are running out of free space and also sends a warning to the NT
event viewer. Administrators should check the log messages and apply
appropriate measures to assure adequate free space.

CAUTION: If the disk space level is exceeded, the NetVault Database can
be damaged.

n Log file page size (Kb): The value entered here is the size of each of the files
(two) created at the time NetVault is opened. Activity is logged to the first file
until the allocated space in that file is used. When the first file is full, NetVault
creates a third file of the same size and continues logging activity to the second
file. These files are created as sparse files, so that if you run out of hard disk
space logging can continue in the pre-allocated files.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 351

n Message Response Interval (in milliseconds): When opening a Logs


window the opening progress dialog box appears. The Cancel button on this
dialog box allows you to cancel the Logs window. Decreasing the response
interval increases the responsiveness of the Cancel button at the expense of
CPU performance.
n Outgoing message bundle size: Log messages are sent to the Logs window
in bundles to improve performance, the size of which is defined in this option.
n Minimum time (in milliseconds) between progress updates: The progress
dialog box that appears when opening logs displays the number of log
messages loaded. This setting specifies how often the dialog box information
is updated.
n Minimum warning level to send to system log: This setting controls how
much of the NetVault logs are sent to the operating system logs.

Media Manager Tab


The options in the Media Manager tab allow you to control the life of savesets on a
piece of imported media, use barcodes as labels and set the backup and restore
priority levels.
The NetVault Configurator’s Media Manager Tab appears as shown in the following
figure:

Information available in the Media Manager tab includes:


352 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

n Minimum life for imported backups (days): When media is deleted from the
NetVault database or a tape from another NetVault server is used, it appears in
the Media Management window as FOREIGN. To access the data through
NetVault, scan the tape to build the contents back into the database using the
tape index. The value entered here controls the life of the savesets on the tape
once it has been scanned. Any existing life spans of savesets on tape remain
in effect after being scanned; the setting in this option affects only expired
savesets and designates its life span after being imported into the database.
n Use barcodes as labels: When selected, this option automatically uses the
barcode of a tape as the tape label. The default naming convention is <server
name><date>. When using barcodes you may want the tape name to match
the barcode. This option applies only if your library has a barcode reader and
your tapes have barcodes.
n Priority Settings: Backup and Restore jobs can be given specific priorities to
change the order in which the jobs are performed. The remaining options in the
Media Manager set default priorities as shown in the following table:
Priority
Types of Priorities
Number
Restore Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 20
Continuation Restore Request Priority Boost 5
Backup Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 30
Continuation Backup Request Priority Boost 5
Label Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10
Blank Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10
The following information applies to the types of priorities:
n For Restore, Backup, Label and Blank requests, 1 is the highest level and 0
runs the request in the background.
n A Continuation request occurs when an unfinished Restore or Backup job
requires more than one piece of media to complete successfully. It is possible
for a job paused for media changes to be pre-empted by another request. In
order to allow the original Restore or Backup request to continue without
interruption, set the priority number of the continuation Restore or Backup to a
smaller number than that of other requests.

Network Manager Tab


The Network Manager tab settings allow you to specify the amount of time NetVault
waits with no activity before dropping network connections, and broadcasts to local
network machines.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 353

The NetVault Configurator’s Network Manager tab contains three additional tabs
and appears as shown in the following figure:

Network Manager Tab (Timeouts)


Settings in the Timeouts tab within the Network Manager tab, which control the time
NetVault waits to make remote connections, are shown in the figure above and
include the following:
n Time (in seconds) to complete a remote connection: The maximum
amount of time NetVault attempts to make a remote connection.
n Time (in seconds) wait before dropping inactive connection: The
maximum amount of time NetVault leaves an inactive session running before
closing the connection.
n Keep Alive rate (in seconds): NetVault sends broadcasts at designated
intervals during active connections (e.g., during backups and restores) to
assure that the network connection is still active between the NetVault
machines in the domain. This setting allows you to send message more or
less frequently.
n Time (in seconds) between availability broadcasts: An availability
broadcast is a message sent from one NetVault machine to all other NetVault
machines informing them of its name and how it can be contacted. The value
in this option defines the time between availability broadcasts. If the interval is
too small network traffic increases, too large and the list of available machines
354 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

may not be displayed as quickly as needed. You can manually add an


undisplayed client using the find utility.
n Time (in seconds) between security broadcasts: The security broadcast
results in the display of a key on the machine icon seen in the Client
Management window. The key in the icon indicates the presence of security
and the need for a password to access that machine.

Network Manager Tab (Connections)


Settings in the Connections tab within the Network Manager tab control broadcasts
to local machines.
The Connections tab within the NetVault Configurator’s Network Manager tab
appears as shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Connections tab includes:


n Broadcast details to machines on local networks: To automatically display
machines in a client’s window, select this option. If this option is cleared you
can add clients only by using the Find utility in the client’s window to locate the
desired client. When this option is cleared, the amount of network traffic
generated by NetVault is reduced; however, adding clients becomes more
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 355

complicated. This option should only be cleared when it is necessary to


reduce network traffic.

NOTE: NetVault uses UDP broadcasts. UDP does not route over different
network segments and machines on different segments do not appear
automatically. They must be found manually.

n Preferred network address: Only used when your machine is connected to


multiple networks either via multiple nics or by virtual IP addressing. To use
this option, enter the IP address of the interface (not the address of the
machine) you prefer NetVault to use as its primary access point no matter
which network(s) the machine is connected to. If this primary network access
is not available, NetVault uses one of the other available networks.
n Comma separated list of barred address(es): The list of addresses you
want to prevent NetVault from using should be entered in this box, separated
by a comma.
Using a combination of these two options can be very helpful to direct your
network’s traffic. For instance, you may have a network specifically for backups and
another network you do not want to use for backup data. In this case you can bar
one network so that NetVault will not use it at all and force the network designated
for backup traffic to be the first one NetVault uses.

CAUTION: Be careful that you do not bar all networks on your server since
you will not be able to perform any backups.

Schedule Manager Tab


The Schedule Manager Tab of the NetVault Configurator allows you to set the
number of days job histories and status are kept, as well as specify the number of
active jobs that can run simultaneously.
356 Appendix F
Using the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator’s Schedule Manager tab appears as shown in the


following figure:

Information available on the Schedule Manager tab includes:


n Number of days to keep job history: This setting limits the number of days of
job information displayed in the Jobs window’s History tab.
n Number of days to keep job status: This setting limits the number of days of
job information displayed in the Job window’s Status tab.
n Maximum simultaneously active jobs: The value entered in this setting limits
the number of jobs than can be running at any one time. Because each running
job consumes a small amount of shared memory, it can be advantageous to
specify a small number of jobs that can run simultaneously. When setting this
value, keep in mind that only a small number of jobs can be writing to media at
any given time. If you submit a large number of jobs, those over the limit will
stay pending until the required resources are available, affected also by the
number of available tape drives.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 357

Security Tab
In the Security tab you can set a new password for the NetVault server or client
installation and disable security. When security is disabled, the machine can be
accessed by any NetVault Server.
The NetVault Configurator’s Security tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Security tab includes:


n Disable Security: When selected, this option allows any NetVault server to
add your machine to its list of clients. Clear this option to require the NetVault
server to provide a password in order to add your machine to a list of clients.
n New Password: To change the machine password enter it in this box.
n Confirm Password: Enter the new password again in this box.
APPENDIX G

Using the Reporting Tool


Using the Reporting Tool - 361
Running nvreport from the Command Line - 361
Report Arguments - 361
Simple Report Example - 362
Using Filters Example - 363
Sorting Output - 364
Creating Custom Templates - 365
n Making New Templates - 366
n Using the Server Argument - 367
Fields Available for Reports - 367
n Report: jobdefinitions (jd) - 368
n Report: jobhistory (jh) - 369
n Report: advancedoptions (ao) - 370
n Report: schedules (sc) - 370
n Report: backuptargets (bt) - 370
n Report: selections (se) - 370
Constants and Syntax - 370
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 361

Using the Reporting Tool


NetVault provides the ability to produce reports on jobs, drives and media through the use of
a command line reporting utility.
Reports are based on template files that define the information and layout of the reports.
The templates can be customized to your specifications.
Information in the reports can be sorted and filtered using mathematical operators. Because
the report utility uses a command line method, it is recommended that you use templates
and batch or script files to automate report generation.

Running nvreport from the Command Line


The nvreport binary is located in the netvault/util directory. Report templates are
stored in the /netvault6/reports/templates directory.
To access the help system for the nvreport utility, navigate to /netvault/util and run
nvreport -help
to list the syntax of nvreport which is
nvreport -argument value -argument value

Report Arguments
Valid report arguments are described in the following table:

Short
Long Argument Description
Argument
help h or ? Displays basic help information, including
details on how to request additional informa-
tion.
reptype r Identifies the nvreport to be produced.
format f Identifies the fields to be included in the
report.
server v Identifies the server to be queried.
sort s Specifies how the output data is sorted.
include i Specified a set of conditions that must be
met for a record to be included in a report.
exclude e Specified a set of conditions that, when met,
exclude items from a report.
template t Identifies the nvreport template to be used.
362 Appendix G
Using the Reporting Tool

Simple Report Example


This section describes a simple process used to produce a report on jobs that have been run
and their status.
Start with the jobhistory report. To run this report issue the command
nvreport -r jh
The report output appears as follows:

JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

1 1 1 backup 1 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00


2 1 1 backup 2 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00
3 1 1 backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:02:49
4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:00:26

By default all the fields shown above are included in the report. To include specific fields,
issue the command
nvreport -help fields jobhistory
to list the fields available for inclusion in this particular report. See Creating Custom
Templates (page 365) for a complete list of the fields available for each type of report.
To define the fields you want to include in the output, issue the following command
nvreport -r jh -f “%exitstatus %startdate %jobid” -s “%exitstatus
%startdate %jobid”
which calls the jobhistory template (jh), includes fields (f) exitstatus, startdate and jobid and
sorts (s) the report by exitstatus, startdate and jobid.
This produces the following output:
JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

1 1 1 backup 1 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00


2 1 1 backup 2 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00
3 1 1 backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:02:49
4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:00:26

Exit Status Start Date JobID

Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 1


NetVault Administrator’s Guide 363

Exit Status Start Date JobID


Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 2
Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 3
Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 4

IMPORTANT: Using format only affects the fields shown in the report. It
does not affect the selection of records included in the output. To filter the
records in the output use the include and exclude arguments.

Using Filters Example


A simple example of excluding data from the report output is explained in this section. For
the report just produced you may want to only see the jobs run yesterday, not those run prior
to yesterday.
To search for jobs with a start date greater than yesterday, issue the following command:
nvreport -r jh -i “startdate > 2000/10/23”
which returns the following output:

JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:00:26

To use a filter string to include or exclude fields, apply the following argument:
“%[fieldname][operator][constant]”
for example: “%ID = 23”
where:
n fieldname can be any valid field name included in the report’s format string. To see
the list of valid field names issue the command
nvreport -help fields [report name]
n operator can be: greater than (>), greater than or equal to (>=), less than (<), less
than or equal to (<=), equal to (=) and not equal to (!=).
n constant is the value you want to find in the specified field.
In addition, filtering expressions can be linked using the Boolean operator AND and OR.
Brackets can be used to order the Boolean expressions as shown in the following simple
example:
“(%jobid > 10 AND %instanceid <5) OR %jdefntype = restoreid”
364 Appendix G
Using the Reporting Tool

or in this more complex example:


nvreport -r jh -include “((%jobid > 10 AND %instanceid < 5) OR
%phaseid = 12) OR (%jdefntype = restore AND %phaseid = 23)”
This example illustrates the way you can nest statements to create sophisticated filters.

Sorting Output
The sort argument is used to order the records included in a report’s output. The sort
specification format is
“%fieldname[+-]”
For example, if you entered %id+, the records are sorted in ascending order by ID. If you
entered %title-, the records appear by title in descending order. Multiple sort expressions
can be combined in a specified order. For example, if you entered “%type+ %jobid+
%title-”, the data is sorted by ascending type, then by ascending job ID, then by
descending title.
The command nvreport -r jh -s “%jobid+” returns the following output:

JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

1 1 1 backup 1 Backup <none> 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00


2 1 1 backup 2 Backup <none> 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00
3 1 1 backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:02:49
4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:00:26

The command nvreport -r jh -s “%jobid-” returns this output:

JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:02:49


5 1 1 backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:26
2 1 1 backup 2 Backup <none> 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00
1 1 1 backup 1 Backup <none> 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00

Notice that the order of the jobs is reversed from that of the first report. Filter arguments can
be applied to any of the relevant fields in the report being run.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 365

Creating Custom Templates


In order to prevent having to enter the series of commands used to produce a report each
time you want to run the report, you can create and save report templates to be used
whenever desired.

IMPORTANT: Save the existing template to a new file name before making
changes. Then you will always have the current template to begin
customizing new reports.

The following is one of the report templates located in the /netvault6/reports directory:
%REPTYPE jobdefinitions
%FORMAT “%ID %TITLE %TYPE %CLIENT::7 %PLUGIN %SCHEDTRIGGER”
%SORT %ID+
This template, the job definitions report, shows the basic fields and sort arguments used in
the report. The first line is the name of the report. The second line defines the format of the
report and the order of field display. The third line defines the sort for the data displayed in
the report output.
Note that one of the fields includes a double colon with a number after it. Each field is
assigned a default number of characters for displaying its value. If you want to increase or
decrease the default value, enter the double colon and the number of characters to be
displayed after the specific field.
In the job definitions report only six of the available fields are included for display in the
output. The output of this report appears as follows:

ID Title Type Client Plugin Trigger

1 backup 1 Backup elliott File System


2 backup 2 Backup elliott File System
3 backup 3 Backup elliott File System
4 backup 4 Backup elliott File System

The following example shows how to add another field to the list of included fields:
%REPTYPE jobdefinitions
%FORMAT “%ID %TITLE %TYPE %CLIENT::7 %PLUGIN %SCHEDTRIGGER
%AOPTSVERIFY”
%SORT %ID+
366 Appendix G
Using the Reporting Tool

The output from the second example now includes the Vrfy column and appears as follows:

ID Title Type Client Plugin Trigger Vrfy

1 backup 1 Backup elliott File System no


2 backup 2 Backup elliott File System yes
3 backup 3 Backup elliott File System no
4 backup 4 Backup elliott File System no

You can filter the data appearing in the output by adding include or exclude statements. On
the command line the syntax is -i or -include, whereas in a report template the argument is
preceeded with a % sign.
In the following example, the job history template, there is no filter applied:
%REPTYPE jobhistory
%FORMAT “%JOBID %INSTANCEID::4 %PHASEID %JDEFNTITLE %JDEFNTYPE
%EXITSTATUS %STARTDATE %STARTTIME::5 %RUNTIME”
%SORT “%JOBID %INSTANCEID+ %PHASEID+”
When a filter is added the report appears as follows:
%REPTYPE jobhistory
%FORMAT “%JOBID %INSTANCEID::4 %PHASEID %JDEFNTITLE %JDEFNTYPE
%EXITSTATUS %STARTDATE %STARTTIME::5 %RUNTIME”
%include “(%startdate > 2000/10/23) and (%exitstatus = backup
complete)”
%SORT “%EXITSTATUS+”
Note the brackets around each filter statement. Also note the use of and to combine the two
statements. You can also use an or operator, if desired. When applying more than 2 filters, it
is important to use double brackets to denote the order in which they should be applied.
Make sure the order and logic of the filters is correct or the resulting output may not be what
you expect.
You can also run multiple reports and direct the output into one large report.

Making New Templates


When NetVault is installed, a default set of templates are stored in the installation
directory. These templates are limited in scope and designed to be used as a basis
for building your specific templates.
When creating new templates, it is recommended that you store them in the
/netvault6/reports/templates directory. If you explicitly reference templates
always enter the entire pathname to locate and retrieve them.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 367

Using the Server Argument


Any NetVault server can run the report tool. Incorporating the -v command in the
report allows you to run a report on your NetVault server remotely from your own
workstation as long as NetVault has been installed on it.
Running reports over the network generates a considerable amount of traffic,
depending on the type of report being run and the amount of information on your
system. Information sent over the network is not filtered until it reaches the
destination machine. So no matter how much data the report outputs, you must
search all the data present. In this type of case, consider logging in remotely to the
NetVault server and running nvreport locally.

Fields Available for Reports


The Fields folder located within the netvault6/reports folder contains a file for each of
the report templates each of which lists:

CAUTION: Do not change the information in the Fields folder without


assistance from Technical Support.

n The fields available for that report type.


n The number of characters the field outputs. This is the default length of the field and it
can be modified. Add a double colon and the number of characters you want to output
directly after the field name (e.g., Trigger::10, where Trigger is normally 12).
n The type of data stored in the field (i.e., integer, string, date, time, etc.). The type of data
in the field is the type that must be used whenever you include conditional statements in
your report. For instance, to output only jobs scheduled to run on January 10th, the
format is “schedDate = 2000/01/10”. DO NOT MODIFY THIS VALUE.
n A “nicename” which is the column heading for included fields. For instance, the field
phaseid is output to the column heading of Phase. The nicename can be modified.
368 Appendix G
Using the Reporting Tool

The following tables list, for each type of report, the fields available for use:

Report: jobdefinitions (jd)


aoptsBackupKeepCount aoptsPreScriptArg id
aoptsBackupType aoptsUsePreScript Options
aoptsCompress aoptsUsePostScript Plugin
aoptsDuplicate aoptsVerify RestoreClient
aoptsDupSchedSet btargAnyDevice schedDate
aoptsDupTargSet btargAutoLabel schedDaysOfMonth
aoptsKeepForNumBacks btargDeviceTree schedDaysOfWeek
aoptsKeepForTime btargFirstJob schedMethod
aoptsKeepTime btargGroup schedName
aoptsMigrate btargMID schedRepeatPeriod
aoptsName btargMinSpace schedTIme
aoptsOrigLife btargName schedTrigger
aoptsOwnDiscardLife btargProtectAfter schedType
aoptsOwnLifeLength btargReuseMedia schedWeeksOfMonth
aoptsPostScript btargSpecMinSpace selecName
aoptsPostScriptArg btargTargetMedia selecTree
aoptsPreScript Client Title
Type
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 369

Report: jobhistory (jh)


enddate jdefnbtargMinSpace
endtime jdefnbtargName
exitstatus jdefnbtargProtectAfter
instanceid jdefnbtargReuseMedia
jdefnaoptsBackupKeepCount jdefnbtargSpecMinSpace
jdefnaoptsBackupType jdefnbtargTargetMedia
jdefnaoptsCompress jdefnId
jdefnaoptsDuplicate jdefnClient
jdefnaoptsDupSchedSet jdefnOptions
jdefnaoptsDupTargSet jdefnPlugin
jdefnaoptsKeepForNumBacks jdefnRestoreClient
jdefnaoptsKeepForTIme jdefnTitle
jdefnaoptsKeepTime jdefnType
jdefnaoptsMigrate jdefnschedDate
jdefnaoptsName jdefnschedDaysOfMonth
jdefnaoptsOrigLife jdefnschedDaysOfWeek
jdefnaoptsOwnDiscardLife jdefnschedMethod
jdefnaoptsOwnLifeLength jdefnschedName
jdefnaoptsPostScript jdefnschedRepeatPeriod
jdefnaoptsPostScriptArg jdefnschedTime
jdefnaoptsPreScript jdefnschedTrigger
jdefnaoptsPreScriptArg jdefnschedType
jdefnaoptsUsePostScript jdefnschedWeeksOfMonth
jdefnaoptsUsePreScript jdefnselecName
jdefnaoptsVerify jdefnselecTree
jdefnbtargAnyDevice JobID
jdefnbtargDeviceTree phaseid
jdefnbtargAutoLabel runtime
jdefnbtargFirstJob starttdate
jdefnbtargGroup starttime
jdefnbtargMID
370 Appendix G
Using the Reporting Tool

Report: advancedoptions (ao)


BackupKeepCount KeepForTime PostScriptArg
BackupType KeepTime PostScript
Compress Migrate PreScriptArg
Duplicate Name PreScript
DupSchedSet OrigLife UsePostScript
DupTargSet OwnDiscardLife UsePreScript
KeepForNumBacks OwnLifeLength Verify

Report: schedules (sc)


Date Method Time
DaysOfMonth Name Trigger
DaysOfWeek RepeatPeriod Type
Weeks OfMonth

Report: backuptargets (bt)


AnyDevice Group ProtectAfter
AutoLabel MID ReuseMedia
DeviceTree MinSpace SpecMinSpace
FirstJob Name TargetMedia

Report: selections (se)


Name Tree

Constants and Syntax


This section defines the formats (syntax) allowed for constants:
Constant Formats
string any character enclosed in single or double quotes
integer a number
time HH:MM:SS (e.g., 22:10:11)
HHMMSS (e.g., 221011)
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 371

Constant Formats
timepassed HH:MM:SS (e.g., 22:10:11)
HHMMSS (e.g., 221011)
date YYYY/MM/DD (e.g., 2000/04/26)
YYYYMMDD (e.g., 20000426)
boolean Yes
No
True
False
hdwmycount NNNN[HDWMY] 12H 2W 564M 44Y
daysinweek A string of days using the following abbreviations:
SU = Sunday
MO = Monday
TU = Tuesday
WE = Wednesday
TH = Thursday
FR = Friday
SA = Saturday
(e.g., MOWEFRSU for Monday, Wednesday, Friday and Sun-
day)
daysinmonth A string of dates separated by commas (e.g., 1,2,4,8,10)
weeksinmonth A string indicating the number of the week in the month (e.g.,
145 for the first, fourth and fifth weeks, 13L for the first, third
and Last week, etc.)
selectiontree N/A
pluginscreen N/A
Glossary
A
Add Library window The Add Library window controls the adding or modifying of libraries
for the selected server. The Library Name field shows the selected
library name, once added. The window contains tabbed control and
information areas to allow different aspects of the library to be set
up and viewed.

Add Standalone Drive The Add Standalone Drive window controls the adding or modifying
window of simple devices to the selected server. The Device Name field
shows the selected device name, once added. The window con-
tains control and information areas to allow the device to be chosen
and added and the device details viewed. There is also a Configure
button to allow the parameters of the device to be changed includ-
ing Configuration, Performance and Statistics settings.

Application Plugin An Application Plugin Module provides a bridge from NetVault to


Module (APM) another application. This allows you to use the NetVault GUI to con-
trol and manage your backup and restore operations in other data-
bases. APM’s are sold separately; contact your BakBone
representative for more information.

B
backup A NetVault backup is the saving of computer data onto media,
under the control of a NetVault Server. With NetVault, many types
of data may be backed up using the appropriate plugin (e.g.
NetVault Database plugin, NT File System plugin, NT Registry plu-
gin, UNIX File System plugin, etc.).

Backup window The NetVault Backup window controls the scheduling of backups
for the selected server and Job Title. The window contains tabbed
control areas to allow different aspects of the backup to be set up
374 Glossary

Backup Set A Backup Set is the complete set of data stored on one or more
items of media for a single backup job. The complete Backup Set
may be contained as one Saveset on a single item of media, or it
can be spread over several items of media (e.g. tapes), occupying a
single unique Saveset on each media item.

C
Client Management The NetVault Client Management window displays client informa-
window tion for the selected server. The window contains two list areas to
display available machines and those added to NetVault as clients;
there is also an area to find NetVault Machines not currently dis-
played in either list.

Configurator The NetVault Configurator is a standard tool included with the


NetVault installation. Normally the Configurator is used to start and
stop NetVault services. It also provides information about the
machine, the license(s) purchased for the machine, the software
installed on the machine and a variety of other options used to man-
age security, interface appearance, logging and many more. For
complete information on the NetVault Configurator see Using the
NetVault Configurator (page 335).

cleaning drive A cleaning drive is a drive with designated slots used to clean tapes.

D
distributed devices NetVault can use distributed devices, i.e. devices can be connected
to any NetVault Node (NetVault server or client), not just to the
NetVault server.

device A NetVault device is any equipment which can hold NetVault media
(e.g. simple tape drives, tape libraries, pseudo disk libraries, optical
drives, etc.). NetVault devices are only controlled by a NetVault
server, whatever computer they may be physically connected to
(e.g. to a local or remote NetVault client, as well as locally on the
NetVault server).

domain A NetVault domain is the term used to signify a group of computers


comprising a NetVault server, and a number of NetVault clients,
(which may be on the local network, remotely via a bridge, gateway
the Internet, etc.).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 375

Device Management The NetVault Device Management window controls the devices
window added to the selected server. The window contains tabbed areas to
allow different control or viewing of various functions

Domain Management The NetVault Domain Management window allows NetVault servers
window to be viewed and controlled.

F
Firewall A system designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a pri-
vate network. Firewalls can be implemented in both hardware and
software or a combination of both. Firewalls are frequently used to
prevent unauthorized internet users from accessing private net-
works connected to the internet, especially intranets. All messages
entering or leaving the intranet pass through the firewall, which
examines each message and blocks those that do not meet the
specified security criteria.

Full backup A Full backup is a complete copy of selected data.

G
GUI The GUI or Graphical User Interface is used to access the windows
and functions provided by NetVault to manage your hardware and
software configurations and data storage. The interface contains
the menu bar, command toolbars and a status line to aid in choos-
ing the desired function.

I
Instance The Instance of a job is a number representing the number of times
that this particular job has been submitted. The first time a new job
is submitted, the number is always 1, the second time it is 2, etc.
(even if you have used View/Edit Job to modify the job in between
submissions, provided you do not change the job title).

Incremental backup An Incremental backup is a copy of the changes made to files or


databases since the last backup was performed.

J
Jobs window The NetVault Jobs window displays jobs submitted for the selected
server. The window contains tabbed areas to allow viewing of various
functions.
376 Glossary

L
Logs window The NetVault Logs window displays log entries for processes controlled
by the selected server. Each log message is preceded with a color-
coded dot, which signifies the message's level of importance.

License The authorization number(s) for the BakBone product(s) you have pur-
chased.

Library A library is any combination of tapes, multi-drive tape jukeboxes,


sequential devices, autochangers, autoloaders, disks, etc. NetVault
controls the devices in a library and libraries can be shared among cli-
ents.

M
Media Management The NetVault Media Management window allows media to be exam-
window ined for the selected server. The window contains a Media selection
area and Details tabbed areas to allow different aspects of either the
media or saveset to be examined.

NAS NAS is the acronym for Network Attached Storage. Devices used in
storage management can be directly attached to a network and
accessed by all clients on the network.

NetVault Database The NetVault database contains all the details for the installation of the
NetVault server, including information on configuration, keys, logs,
media and schedules. This information is critical to keeping NetVault
operations available and recoverable in case of a catastrophic event.

Node A NetVault Node is any networked computer with NetVault (server or


client) software installed. A Node can act as a NetVault server for one
NetVault domain, and at the same time be a NetVault client to another
NetVault server in another NetVault domain.
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 377

P
Phase When the NetVault Backup Advanced Option, Duplicate is used the dupli-
cate job is allocated the same Job ID and Job Title as the backup job, but
the Phase for the duplicate job will read 2 (so that the duplicate can be
identified). In all other cases, the Phase of jobs will read 1. This informa-
tion is shown in the NetVault Server Status window, Job Status area.

plugin A plugin is a NetVault program module designed to add functionality to


NetVault core features. Plugins included with the NetVault installation are
the Data Copy, Consolidate File System Backups, File System and Raw
Device.

Policy Manage- The Policy Management window organizes and accesses the backup Pol-
ment Window icy Sets you have saved for selection, target and advanced options.

Policy Set A Policy Set is a collection of options defined for a job, or portion of a job,
saved for future re-use.

priorities A Priority assigns the order in which jobs run. Default settings are found in
the Using the NetVault Configurator (page 337). In addition, individual job
priorities can be set to override the default settings. For more information,
see The Media Requests Tab (page 72) in Chapter 4.

R
restore A NetVault restore is the restoration of computer data from media, under
the control of a NetVault server. With NetVault, many types of data may
be restored using the appropriate plugin (e.g. NetVault Database plugin,
NT File System plugin, NT Registry plugin, UNIX File System plugin,
etc.). Data may be restored from a tape imported from another NetVault
server's device using the media Scan facility. Data may also be restored
to a different Target client, Location or Name, from that of the original
backup.

Restore window The NetVault Restore window controls the scheduling of restores for the
selected server and Job Title. The window contains tabbed control areas
to allow different aspects of the restore to be set up.
378 Glossary

S
Saveset A Saveset is the set of data stored on a single item of media for a NetVault
backup job. An item of media (e.g. a tape) may contain several Savesets,
each a single Backup Set for a job; but a Backup Set may be large enough
to be spread over several items of media, occupying a unique Saveset on
each media item.

Selection Sets Selection Sets allow often used selections in several tabs of both the
Backup and Restore windows to be saved and used for multiple jobs. This
time saving feature is described in Using Policy (Set) Templates (page
263).

Server A NetVault server controls all backup and restores for all NetVault clients
in a NetVault domain., including the server machine itself acting as a cli-
ent. NetVault devices are only controlled by a NetVault server, wherever
they may be physically connected (e.g. to a remote NetVault client, as well
as locally). A NetVault server may be remotely controlled using NetVault
Domain Management.

Server Status The NetVault Server Status window displays status information for the
window selected server. The window contains individual, re-sizeable areas to dis-
play each type of information.

Shared Devices A device being used by two or more machines through a shared-SCSI or
SAN (Storage Area Network) is a shared device. A shared drive can be
used by NetVault as a local drive when backing up the client, increasing
the efficiency of data transfer across the network.

SAN (Storage The Storage Area Network provides the ability to attach devices to client
Area Network) with high-speed connections to provide centralized tape storage and drive
sharing.

target media Target media is a specific tape, disk or other piece of media where data
being restored is placed.

Template A template is a block or pattern used as a basis to build a new function


(e.g., customized reports).
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 379

tracing Tracing is a NetVault utility that allows you to capture and store a history of
events. With this file you can provide Technical Support (page 6) with
enough information to diagnose a problem.

Tree A tree is another name for a hierarchical list which indents from trunk to
branch to twig, etc. (but upside-down!). It is the method used for displaying
data in both the NetVault Backup and Restore windows, using the relevant
plugin or APM.

Triggered Job NetVault backup and restore jobs can be created and saved as triggered
jobs. They are only added to the schedule list when they are triggered
using a provided nvtrigger program.

V
virtual library A virtual library is a library set up in a temporary area, such as a hard
drive, used to perform disk staging and tape cleaning.
INDEX
A
add library window ................................................................................................ 373
add standalone drive window ............................................................................... 373
adding ..................................................................................................................... 81
a NetVault Client ............................................................................................... 111
clients ............................................................................................................... 111
libraries............................................................................................................... 81
shared libraries ................................................................................................... 87
Adding Libraries
Add Library Screen Functions .............................................................................. 82
Administrator’s Guide, about .................................................................................... 4
advanced features ................................................................................................ 271
backup life ........................................................................................................ 274
compression ..................................................................................................... 274
duplication ........................................................................................................ 275
nvtrigger commands .......................................................................................... 285
pre and post scripts ........................................................................................... 278
verify after backup ............................................................................................. 275
advanced options tab ........................................................................................... 273
in backup window .............................................................................................. 178
in restore window .............................................................................................. 217
advancedoptions report ........................................................................................ 370
AIX 4.2/4.3
installing NetVault software on AIX 4.2/4.3 ............................................................ 16
APM (Application Plugin Module) ......................................................................... 373
Archive (Advanced Backup Option) ..................................................................... 274
B
backup
consolidating ..................................................................................................... 185
consolidating sets .............................................................................................. 186
definition ........................................................................................................... 373
full .................................................................................................................... 375
incremental ....................................................................................................... 375
382 Index

life ....................................................................................................................
274
NetVault Database............................................................................................. 149
raw device (NT) .................................................................................................187
raw device (UNIX) ............................................................................................. 192
selecting data ....................................................................................................
162
set ....................................................................................................................
374
simple ...............................................................................................................
180
to Specific Media ...............................................................................................175
window ..................................................................................................... 159,373
backup life option .................................................................................................. 274
Backup Management
Backup window functions ................................................................................... 160
Menus ........................................................................................................
161
Incremental Backup Procedure ........................................................................... 179
Using the Advanced Options Tab ........................................................................ 178
Using the Backup Options Tab ........................................................................... 168
General Backup Options .............................................................................. 169
Using the Schedule Tab .....................................................................................173
Using the Selections Tab ...................................................................................162
Using the Target Tab .........................................................................................
174
Device Options ............................................................................................
174
General Options ..........................................................................................
177
Media Options .............................................................................................
175
backup options tab, in backup window ................................................................. 168
backup saveset commands, in media management ............................................ 135
backup saveset, status ......................................................................................... 135
backup sets
consolidating ..................................................................................................... 186
copying ............................................................................................................. 152
backup tab, in media management ...................................................................... 136
backup through mount points ............................................................................... 170
backup window ............................................................................................... 52, 159
2000 backup options .......................................................................................... 171
backup options tab............................................................................................. 168
miscellaneous switches ................................................................................ 170
buttons .............................................................................................................. 160
commands ........................................................................................................ 161
general backup options ...................................................................................... 169
NT backup options ............................................................................................. 171
schedule tab ...................................................................................................... 173
selections tab .................................................................................................... 162
tabs .................................................................................................................. 160
type of backup ................................................................................................... 169
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 383

UNIX Filesystem backup options ........................................................................ 172


backups ................................................................................................................. 157
copying ..................................................................................................... 151, 152
incremental ....................................................................................................... 179
restoring incremental ................................................................................. 180, 218
selections in NT ................................................................................................. 163
selections in W2K .............................................................................................. 167
simple ............................................................................................................... 181
backuptarget report ............................................................................................... 370
BakBone Software .................................................................................................... 6
basics ...................................................................................................................... 41
block size .............................................................................................................. 297
C
cleaning
automatic interval .............................................................................................. 100
drives .......................................................................................................... 97, 374
life of media....................................................................................................... 100
manual .............................................................................................................. 101
slots .................................................................................................................... 97
client
adding (to NetVault Server) ................................................................................ 111
finding Unlisted NetVault Machine ...................................................................... 109
Install Software (optional plugin) ......................................................................... 108
Properties ................................................................................................. 108, 121
client management........................................................................................ 103, 105
available NetVault machines .............................................................................. 106
clients ....................................................................................................... 107, 108
Find NetVault Machine ............................................................................... 108, 109
client management window .................................................................... 48, 105, 374
client status, in server status window ................................................................... 143
client transfer nodes ............................................................................................... 61
command line reports ........................................................................................... 361
arguments ......................................................................................................... 361
example ............................................................................................................ 362
fields ................................................................................................................. 367
filtering .............................................................................................................. 363
sorting .............................................................................................................. 364
templates .......................................................................................................... 365
templates, new .................................................................................................. 366
command toolbar .................................................................................................... 45
commands
384 Index

in logs window ................................................................................................... 252


in restore window............................................................................................... 201
status ................................................................................................................
243
configurator ..................................................................................... 31, 335, 359, 374
fire wall tab ........................................................................................................ 344
general tab ........................................................................................................ 341
GUI tab ............................................................................................................. 345
license tab......................................................................................................... 338
logging daemon tab ........................................................................................... 349
machine tab ...................................................................................................... 337
media manager tab ............................................................................................ 351
network manager tab ......................................................................................... 352
packages tab ..................................................................................................... 340
plugin options tab .............................................................................................. 343
running ............................................................................................................. 306
schedule manager tab........................................................................................ 355
security tab ....................................................................................................... 357
service tab ........................................................................................................ 339
configuring
Linux...................................................................................................................
38
NetVault ..............................................................................................................
38
consolidate file system backups plugin ................................................................ 182
consolidating
backups ............................................................................................................ 185
constants, report ................................................................................................... 370
copying
backup sets ............................................................................................... 152,
268
backups ............................................................................................................
152
data ..................................................................................................................
151
CTN (client transfer node) ...................................................................................... 61
D
data copy plugin .................................................................................................... 151
data stream ........................................................................................................... 302
data, searching for .................................................................................................. 57
database
management ..................................................................................................... 147
recovery ............................................................................................................ 147
restore .............................................................................................................. 150
sizing .................................................................................................................. 24
debugging ............................................................................................................... 37
details tab, in media management........................................................................ 129
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 385

device management window .................................................................... 47, 64, 375


device logs tab .................................................................................................... 71
devices tab .......................................................................................................... 66
drive commands ............................................................................................ 68
entry/exit port commands ............................................................................... 70
drive lights ........................................................................................................... 65
icons ................................................................................................................... 65
media requests tab .............................................................................................. 72
tabs .................................................................................................................... 65
device management windows
devices tab
library commands .......................................................................................... 67
device status, in server status window ................................................................. 142
devices .................................................................................................................... 61
adding ................................................................................................................ 77
adding in W2K ..................................................................................................... 92
adding shared standalone drives .......................................................................... 77
connections ......................................................................................................... 61
creating ............................................................................................................... 94
creating virtual libraries ...................................................................................... 331
definition of ................................................................................................. 61, 374
distributed ......................................................................................................... 374
generating ......................................................................................................... 332
in Windows NT .................................................................................................... 63
planning a shared installation ............................................................................... 61
setting up ............................................................................................................ 63
shared .............................................................................................................. 378
shared SCSI ........................................................................................................ 63
types................................................................................................................... 61
dialogs
edit drive ...........................................................................................................
294
filter options.......................................................................................................
259
machine details .................................................................................................119
disaster recovery ................................................................................................... 149
disk devices............................................................................................. 94, 331, 332
Domain
Network Diagram ...............................................................................................
111
domain management ............................................................................................ 115
available NetVault Servers
icons ........................................................................................................... 118
available NetVault servers .................................................................................. 118
pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 119
Controlled Servers ............................................................................................. 119
386 Index

icons ...........................................................................................................
120
pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 121
Find NetVault Machine ....................................................................................... 121
Server, making default for control ....................................................................... 121
window ....................................................................................................... 48,
117
domain management window ............................................................................... 375
domain, definition of .............................................................................................. 374
drive lights, in server status window ..................................................................... 142
drives
cleaning ..............................................................................................................
97
scanning .............................................................................................................
94
dumping log files ................................................................................................... 305
duplication, of backup ........................................................................................... 275
DVD-RAM ............................................................................................................... 61
E
edit drive dialog ..................................................................................................... 294
errors
for jobs .............................................................................................................. 257
in searches ....................................................................................................... 110
F
features
advanced .......................................................................................................... 271
NetVault ................................................................................................................ 3
fields
reports .............................................................................................................. 367
file system plugin
selections in NT ................................................................................................. 163
selections in W2K .............................................................................................. 167
filter options dialog ................................................................................................ 259
filter options, in restore window ............................................................................ 210
by date range .................................................................................................... 211
show on-line status ............................................................................................ 212
filtering
logs .................................................................................................................. 258
reports .............................................................................................................. 363
finding
a NetVault machine ................................................................................... 108, 121
an unlisted NetVault machine ............................................................................. 109
fire wall tab, configurator....................................................................................... 344
firewall, definition of .............................................................................................. 375
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 387

firewalls ........................................................................................................... 94, 288


full backup ............................................................................................................. 375
G
general backup options ......................................................................................... 169
general tab, configurator ....................................................................................... 341
generations ........................................................................................................... 136
Glossary ................................................................................................................ 373
GUI .................................................................................................................. 43, 375
GUI tab, configurator ............................................................................................ 345
H
hardware
support ............................................................................................................. 321
help............................................................................................................................ 5
history tab
in jobs management window .............................................................................. 247
in media management window ........................................................................... 131
I
Icons
Client Status ...................................................................................................... 143
Clients List ........................................................................................................ 107
Controlled Servers Area ..................................................................................... 120
Machine
Available NetVault Machines ................................................................ 106, 118
server status .....................................................................................................143
importing media .................................................................................................... 151
incremental backups ............................................................................................. 375
procedure ......................................................................................................... 179
restoring.................................................................................................... 180, 218
installing
NetVault software .................................................................................................. 9
on AIX 4.2/4/3 ............................................................................................... 16
on Compaq TRU64 ........................................................................................ 17
on FreeBSD 3.2 ............................................................................................. 17
on HP9000/700/800 ....................................................................................... 17
on HP-UX 10/11 ............................................................................................ 17
on IRIX 6.2/6.5 .............................................................................................. 18
on LINUX ...................................................................................................... 18
on NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03 ................................................................ 19
on SCO Open Server 5 .................................................................................. 20
388 Index

on Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) ........................................................................... 20


on Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) ........................................................................... 21
on Sun Solaris 7 ............................................................................................ 21
on Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) ............................................................................. 22
on UnixWare 2.1.3 ......................................................................................... 23
on UnixWare 7 .............................................................................................. 23
on Windows 2000 .......................................................................................... 18
on Windows 95/98 Client ................................................................................ 19
on Windows NT ............................................................................................. 10
on Windows NT 4.0 ....................................................................................... 19
packages .......................................................................................................... 331
plugins ................................................................................................................ 25
instance ................................................................................................................. 375
introduction to NetVault ............................................................................................ 1
J
job logs, extended ................................................................................................. 254
job management ........................................................................................... 239, 241
deleting ............................................................................................................. 246
using history tabbed area
pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 247
job management window
Using the History Tab ........................................................................................ 247
using the Jobs Tab ............................................................................................ 245
pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 246
using the Status Tab .......................................................................................... 242
Log Entry Headings ..................................................................................... 242
pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 245
job status, in server status window ....................................................................... 143
jobdefinitions report............................................................................................... 368
jobhistory report .................................................................................................... 369
jobs
errors ................................................................................................................
257
history ...............................................................................................................
247
logs ..................................................................................................................
249
scheduling......................................................................................................... 225
status ................................................................................................................
242
triggering ...........................................................................................................
285
warnings ...........................................................................................................256
window ....................................................................................................... 54, 375
jobs tab, in jobs management window ................................................................. 245
jukeboxes ................................................................................................................ 61
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 389

L
libraries ............................................................................................................ 81, 376
adding shared ..................................................................................................... 87
creating pseudo/virtual ......................................................................................... 94
creating virtual ................................................................................................... 331
jukeboxes ........................................................................................................... 61
stackers .............................................................................................................. 61
virtual ........................................................................................................ 329, 379
virtual libraries ..................................................................................................... 64
library management ................................................................................................ 59
license ................................................................................................................... 376
license tab, configurator ........................................................................................ 338
licenses for NetVault products ................................................................................ 26
Linux
configuring .......................................................................................................... 38
uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 40
loading
sets .................................................................................................................. 268
log files
dumping ............................................................................................................ 305
logging daemon tab, configurator ......................................................................... 349
logs ........................................................................................................................ 249
extended ........................................................................................................... 254
filtering .............................................................................................................. 258
job messages .................................................................................................... 255
viewing extended ............................................................................................... 254
window ............................................................................................... 55, 251, 376
buttons ........................................................................................................ 252
comands ..................................................................................................... 252
M
Machine Details dialog .......................................................................................... 119
machine tab, configurator ..................................................................................... 337
managing
clients ............................................................................................................... 103
devices ............................................................................................................... 59
domains ............................................................................................................ 115
jobs .......................................................................................................... 239, 241
libraries ............................................................................................................... 59
NetVault database ............................................................................................. 147
software ................................................................................................................ 7
media
390 Index

importing unknown............................................................................................. 151


scanning ............................................................................................................. 94
target ................................................................................................................ 378
media management .............................................................................................. 125
Backup Saveset commands ............................................................................... 135
Status ......................................................................................................... 135
details tab ......................................................................................................... 129
history tab ......................................................................................................... 131
library Info tab ................................................................................................... 132
Media Commands
Properties ................................................................................................... 129
Remove ...................................................................................................... 128
Status .........................................................................................................
128
media request tab .............................................................................................. 132
pop-up commands ............................................................................................. 128
statistics tab ......................................................................................................
130
status information .............................................................................................. 129
media management window ................................................................... 50, 127, 376
media manager tab, configurator .......................................................................... 351
memory size .......................................................................................................... 297
menu bar ................................................................................................................. 43
modified files
during backup.................................................................................................... 170
modify
sets .................................................................................................................. 268
mount points, backing up ...................................................................................... 170
MP-RAS
uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 40
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage) ......................................................................... 376
NetVault
basics ................................................................................................................. 41
configurator ................................................................................. 31, 335, 359, 374
configuring .......................................................................................................... 38
database ........................................................................................................... 376
database backup ............................................................................................... 149
database restore ............................................................................................... 150
database size ...................................................................................................... 24
disaster recovery ............................................................................................... 149
features ................................................................................................................ 3
introduction to NetVault .......................................................................................... 1
licenses for products ............................................................................................ 26
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 391

node ................................................................................................................. 376


plugins .................................................................................................................. 4
Software ............................................................................................................... 7
uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 39
NetVault Server Status
Client Status ...................................................................................................... 143
Device Status .................................................................................................... 142
Drive Lights ................................................................................................. 142
Job Status
Completed Job commands ........................................................................... 145
Running Job commands ............................................................................... 145
Scheduled Job commands ........................................................................... 144
Operator Status ................................................................................................. 146
NetVault software
installing................................................................................................................ 9
installing on AIX 4.2/4.3 ....................................................................................... 16
installing on Compaq TRU64 ................................................................................ 17
installing on FreeBSD 3.2 ..................................................................................... 17
installing on HP9000/700/800 ............................................................................... 17
installing on HP-UX 10/11 .................................................................................... 17
installing on IRIX 6.2/6.5 ...................................................................................... 18
installing on LINUX .............................................................................................. 18
installing on NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03 ........................................................ 19
installing on SCO Open Server 5 .......................................................................... 20
installing on Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) ................................................................... 20
installing on Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) ................................................................... 21
installing on Sun Solaris 7 .................................................................................... 21
installing on Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC)...................................................................... 22
installing on UnixWare 2.1.3 ................................................................................. 23
installing on UnixWare 7 ....................................................................................... 23
installing on Windows 2000 .................................................................................. 18
installing on Windows 95/98 Client ........................................................................ 19
installing on Windows NT ..................................................................................... 10
installing on Windows NT 4.0................................................................................ 19
Network Attached Storage (NAS) ......................................................................... 376
Network Diagram .................................................................................................. 111
network manager tab, configurator ....................................................................... 352
node ...................................................................................................................... 376
nvreport ................................................................................................................. 361
arguments ......................................................................................................... 361
example ............................................................................................................ 362
fields ................................................................................................................. 367
filtering .............................................................................................................. 363
392 Index

sorting ..............................................................................................................364
templates .......................................................................................................... 365
templates, new .................................................................................................. 366
nvtrigger ................................................................................................................ 285
commands ........................................................................................................ 285

O
operating system support ..................................................................................... 323
operator status, in server status window .............................................................. 146
options tab, in restore window .............................................................................. 212
P
package installation .............................................................................................. 331
packages tab, configurator ................................................................................... 340
Performance Tuning ............................................................................................. 289
block size .......................................................................................................... 297
data stream ....................................................................................................... 302
Gathering Statistics ............................................................................................ 297
memory size ...................................................................................................... 297
Optimizing Drive Performance .................................................................... 291, 294
phase..................................................................................................................... 377
platform support .................................................................................................... 323
plugin options tab, configurator ............................................................................ 343
plugins
consolidate file system backups .......................................................................... 182
data copy .......................................................................................................... 151
definition of ....................................................................................................... 377
installing.............................................................................................................. 25
NetVault ................................................................................................................ 4
properties of in Client Management ............................................................. 108, 121
raw device......................................................................................................... 186
policy management window ........................................................................... 56, 377
policy management, using .................................................................................... 270
policy sets ............................................................................................................. 218
copy .................................................................................................................
268
definition of .......................................................................................................
377
loading ..............................................................................................................
268
modify ...............................................................................................................
268
saving ...............................................................................................................
267
schedule ...........................................................................................................
270
types of .............................................................................................................
265
policy templates ............................................................................................ 263, 265
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 393

pop-up commands
media management window ............................................................................... 128
pre and post scripts............................................................................................... 278
priorities
default settings .................................................................................................... 76
job priorities....................................................................................................... 377
of requests .......................................................................................................... 72
pseudo (virtual) libraries ......................................................................................... 94
R
raw device plugin .................................................................................................. 186
backup (NT) ...................................................................................................... 187
backup (UNIX) ................................................................................................... 192
restore (NT)....................................................................................................... 189
restore (UNIX) ................................................................................................... 193
renaming
a file for restore ......................................................................................... 205, 207
directory for restore ............................................................................................ 206
reports ................................................................................................................... 359
advancedoptions ............................................................................................... 370
backuptarget ..................................................................................................... 370
constants .......................................................................................................... 370
jobdefinitions ..................................................................................................... 368
jobhistory .......................................................................................................... 369
schedules ......................................................................................................... 370
selections .......................................................................................................... 370
syntax ............................................................................................................... 370
request
priorities ........................................................................................................ 72, 76
restore ........................................................................................................... 197, 377
advanced options .............................................................................................. 217
comprehensive .................................................................................................. 197
filter options....................................................................................................... 210
By Date Range ............................................................................................ 211
Show On-Line Status ................................................................................... 212
incremental backups .......................................................................................... 218
NetVault database ............................................................................................. 150
Options ............................................................................................................. 212
raw device (NT) ................................................................................................. 189
raw device (UNIX) ............................................................................................. 193
renaming a directory .......................................................................................... 206
renaming a file ........................................................................................... 205, 207
scheduling......................................................................................................... 216
394 Index

search for data .................................................................................................. 209


setting selection method..................................................................................... 208
simple ............................................................................................................... 222
to Specific Client ................................................................................................ 215
window ....................................................................................................... 53, 377
Restore Management ........................................................................................... 197
Restoring Incremental Backups .......................................................................... 218
Using the Advanced Options Tab ........................................................................ 217
Using the Restore Options Tab ........................................................................... 212
Types of Standard Restore Options .............................................................. 213
Using the Schedule Tab ..................................................................................... 216
Using the Selections Tab ................................................................................... 202
Data Selection Example ............................................................................... 202
Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection ..................................................... 205
Selecting the Data to be Restored ................................................................ 202
Setting Restore Selection Method ................................................................. 208
Using Restore Filter Options ......................................................................... 210
Using Restore Search Facility ....................................................................... 209
Using the Target Client Tab ................................................................................ 215
restore options
UNIX................................................................................................................. 215
Windows 2000 ................................................................................................... 214
Windows NT ...................................................................................................... 213
restore window ...................................................................................................... 199
commands ........................................................................................................ 201
selecting data .................................................................................................... 202
selections tab .................................................................................................... 202
tabs .................................................................................................................. 200
S
SAN (Storage Area Network) ......................................................................... 63, 378
SAN devices............................................................................................................ 62
Saveset Information in Details Area ..................................................................... 135
savesets ........................................................................................................ 218, 378
saving sets ............................................................................................................ 267
scanning
drives ..................................................................................................................
94
media .................................................................................................................
94
schedule manager tab, configurator ..................................................................... 355
schedule tab
in backup window .............................................................................................. 173
in restore window...............................................................................................216
schedules report ................................................................................................... 370
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 395

scheduling
backup jobs ............................................................................................... 225, 228
immediate ......................................................................................................... 228
jobs ..................................................................................................................
225
once .................................................................................................................
228
options ..............................................................................................................
227
repeating ...........................................................................................................
232
restore jobs ............................................................................................... 225, 228
sets ..................................................................................................................
270
triggered ...........................................................................................................
237
scripts, using ......................................................................................................... 280
search
errors ................................................................................................................ 110
searching for data ........................................................................................... 57, 209
security tab, configurator ...................................................................................... 357
segment tabs, in media management .......................................................... 137, 138
selecting data
for backup .........................................................................................................162
in restore window............................................................................................... 202
selecting items ........................................................................................................ 58
selection set .......................................................................................................... 378
selections report .................................................................................................... 370
selections tab
in backup window .............................................................................................. 162
in restore window............................................................................................... 202
server .................................................................................................................... 378
server status window .............................................................................. 50, 139, 378
client status ....................................................................................................... 143
device status ..................................................................................................... 142
job status .................................................................................................. 143, 144
operator status .................................................................................................. 146
service tab, configurator ....................................................................................... 339
set (policy) templates .................................................................................... 263, 265
setting selection method for restore ..................................................................... 208
setting up a Device ................................................................................................. 63
shared devices ...................................................................................................... 378
shared devices installation, planning for ................................................................ 61
shared SCSI devices ........................................................................................ 61, 63
shared standalone drives, adding to clients ........................................................... 77
simple procedure
backups ............................................................................................................ 181
restore .............................................................................................................. 222
396 Index

size of NetVault database ....................................................................................... 24


slots, cleaning ......................................................................................................... 97
software
configuring .......................................................................................................... 38
installing NetVault .................................................................................................. 9
installing on AIX 4.2/4.3 ....................................................................................... 16
installing on Compaq TRU64 ................................................................................ 17
installing on FreeBSD 3.2 ..................................................................................... 17
installing on HP9000/700/800 ............................................................................... 17
installing on HP-UX 10/11 .................................................................................... 17
installing on IRIX 6.2/6.5 ...................................................................................... 18
installing on LINUX .............................................................................................. 18
installing on NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03 ........................................................ 19
installing on SCO Open Server 5 .......................................................................... 20
installing on Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) ................................................................... 20
installing on Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) ................................................................... 21
installing on Sun Solaris 7 .................................................................................... 21
installing on Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC)...................................................................... 22
installing on UnixWare 2.1.3 ................................................................................. 23
installing on UnixWare 7 ....................................................................................... 23
installing on Windows 2000 .................................................................................. 18
installing on Windows 95/98 Client ........................................................................ 19
installing on Windows NT ..................................................................................... 10
installing on Windows NT 4.0................................................................................ 19
support ............................................................................................................. 321
uninstalling NetVault ............................................................................................ 39
Solaris
uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 40
sorting
reports .............................................................................................................. 364
stackers ................................................................................................................... 61
statistics ................................................................................................................ 297
statistics tab, in media management .................................................................... 130
status
cleaning drives/slots ............................................................................................ 98
status commands, in jobs management window.................................................. 243
status information, in media management ........................................................... 129
status tab, in job management window ................................................................ 242
status, of jobs ........................................................................................................ 242
Storage Area Network .......................................................................................... 378
using................................................................................................................... 62
support
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 397

hardware ...........................................................................................................
321
operating system ............................................................................................... 323
platforms ...........................................................................................................
323
software ............................................................................................................
321
support, technical ...................................................................................................... 6
syntax, report ........................................................................................................ 370
T
tape cleaning ........................................................................................................... 97
tape libraries, virtual ................................................................................................ 64
Target Device ........................................................................................................ 174
Target Media ................................................................................................. 175, 378
target tab, in backup window ................................................................................ 175
technical support ....................................................................................................... 6
templates ............................................................................................................... 378
policy ................................................................................................................ 265
reports ...................................................................................................... 365, 366
toolbar, commands ................................................................................................. 45
tracing ............................................................................................................. 37, 379
creating files ...................................................................................................... 306
tree ........................................................................................................................ 379
triggered job .......................................................................................................... 379
triggering jobs using nvtrigger ...................................................................... 237, 285
troubleshooting ..................................................................................................... 303
using log files .................................................................................................... 305
types of backups ................................................................................................... 169
U
uninstalling
from Linux ........................................................................................................... 40
from MP-RAS ...................................................................................................... 40
from Solaris ......................................................................................................... 40
from UNIX ........................................................................................................... 40
from Windows NT ................................................................................................ 39
NetVault .............................................................................................................. 39
UNIX
filesystem backup options .................................................................................. 172
restore options .................................................................................................. 215
uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 40
user interface .................................................................................................. 43, 375
using Advanced features ...................................................................................... 271
Backup and Restore Advanced Options
398 Index

Backup Life (NetVault Backup only) .............................................................. 274


Compression (NetVault Backup and Restore) ................................................ 274
Duplication (NetVault Backup only) ............................................................... 275
Pre and Post Scripts (NetVault Backup and Restore) ..................................... 278
Verify after Backup (NetVault Backup only) ................................................... 275
triggering jobs using nvtrigger ............................................................................. 285
nvtrigger commands .................................................................................... 285
triggered Backup Job (multiple word trigger name)......................................... 287
triggered Backup Job (single word trigger name) ........................................... 286
UNIX example ................................................................................................... 284
Windows NT example ........................................................................................ 280
using Filter Options Dialog.................................................................................... 259
using help .................................................................................................................. 5
using Logs ............................................................................................................. 249
filtering .............................................................................................................. 258
Filtering Options Dialog ...................................................................................... 259
Viewing Extended Logs ...................................................................................... 254
Errors ......................................................................................................... 257
Job Messages ............................................................................................. 255
Warnings .................................................................................................... 256
using Policy (Set) Templates ................................................................................ 263
Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 270
Set Control Functions
Saving a Set using the Save As button .......................................................... 267
Standard Policy (Set) Facilities
Set Controls ................................................................................................
266
Standard Policy (Set) features ............................................................................266
using policy management ..................................................................................... 270
using Regular Expressions ........................................................................... 315, 321
using the configurator ................................................................................... 335, 359
using the Edit Drive Dialog ................................................................................... 294
V
Verify ..................................................................................................................... 275
virtual libraries ............................................................................................... 329, 379
creating ............................................................................................................. 331
W
warnings
for jobs .............................................................................................................. 256
windows
add library ......................................................................................................... 373
add standalone drive.......................................................................................... 373
NetVault Administrator’s Guide 399

backup ................................................................................................ 52, 159, 373


client management .............................................................................. 48, 105, 374
device management .................................................................. 47, 64, 65, 66, 375
domain management ........................................................................... 48, 117, 375
jobs ............................................................................................................ 54, 375
logs .................................................................................................... 55, 251, 376
media management ............................................................................. 50, 127, 376
policy management ...................................................................................... 56, 377
restore ................................................................................................ 53, 199, 377
server status ....................................................................................... 50, 139, 378
Windows 2000
adding devices .................................................................................................... 92
backup options .................................................................................................. 171
file system selections ......................................................................................... 167
restore options .................................................................................................. 214
Windows NT
backup options .................................................................................................. 171
devices ............................................................................................................... 63
file system selections ......................................................................................... 163
installing NetVault software on .............................................................................. 10
restore options .................................................................................................. 213
uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 39

You might also like